JP6101955B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a holding frame that is provided on the front side of a storage frame that stores a game board in which a game area is formed and that can be opened and closed, and that holds a transparent member in correspondence with a window portion that allows the game area to be visually recognized. Related to gaming machines.

In a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a game board in which a game area is formed is housed in an inner frame supported to be opened and closed on the front surface of the outer frame, and the game area can be seen through the front surface of the inner frame In general, a holding frame (glass frame) that holds the transparent member corresponding to the window is supported so as to be openable and closable.
In recent years, a movable effect device for executing effects that enhance the interest of games is provided on the front of the game machine, specifically on the upper part of the window formed on the holding frame (glass frame), etc., and can be moved as the game progresses. There has also been proposed a gaming machine that causes a staging device to perform a staging operation (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).

JP 2010-246711 A JP-A-2005-230221

  By the way, in the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent document, since the movable rendering device that performs the rendering operation is only provided on the upper portion of the holding frame (glass frame), the appealing power to the player is low. The production effect was not improved effectively.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine having a movable effect device that has a high appealing power to the player and can effectively enhance the effect. With the goal.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine provided with a holding frame that is provided on the front side of a storage frame that stores a game board in which a game area is formed, and that holds a transparent member corresponding to a window portion that allows the game area to be visually recognized ,
The holding frame is
Provided with a plurality of movable effect devices arranged on the periphery of the window part and capable of performing an effect operation according to the progress of the game,
The plurality of movable effect devices are:
A plurality of movable effect members for performing the effect operation;
A drive unit for causing the plurality of movable effect members to perform an effect operation,
The plurality of movable effect members are arranged on the front side of the holding frame so as to be arranged along the periphery of the window portion ,
A part of the game board is converted into a visually recognizable state and a visually difficult state by an effect operation of the plurality of movable effect members,
Some of the game board is characterized in decorative region der Rukoto the game ball is not flow down.

  According to the present invention, since the plurality of movable effect members provided in each of the plurality of movable effect devices are arranged along the periphery of the window portion, it is possible to perform the effect operation in a wide range in front of the holding frame. Thus, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player and effectively improve the performance effect.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of the first embodiment from the front side. It is a front view of the game board with which the gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member with which the gaming machine of a 1st embodiment is provided from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front structural member with which the game machine of 1st Embodiment is provided from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the back surface constituent member with which the gaming machine of a 1st embodiment is provided from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back surface component member with which the gaming machine of a 1st embodiment is provided from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball storage device from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the ball storage device from the front side. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the internal structure of a bulb | ball storage unit. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the storage control mechanism of a bulb | ball storage unit. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the internal structure of a ball presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball production unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the winning ball direction device from the back side. It is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning aspect of the rocking | fluctuation production | presentation member of a winning ball production | presentation apparatus. It is the perspective view which looked at the back surface component lower part from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the sub display unit from the front side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a rotation drive part. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the internal structure of a rotation drive part. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the sub display unit from the front side. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a slide mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of special result. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure explaining a fluctuation group selection table. It is a figure explaining a fluctuation group selection table. It is a figure explaining a fluctuation group selection table. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining 1st main processing. It is a flowchart explaining an interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining 2nd main processing. It is a flowchart explaining 1st scene control processing. It is a flowchart explaining a customer waiting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart explaining a quasi-continuous chance control process. It is a figure which shows an example of a quasi-continuous chance effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a quasi-continuous chance effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a quasi-continuous chance effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation area increase production. It is a time chart explaining the execution aspect of a pseudo | simulation continuous chance effect and a fluctuation area increase effect. It is a figure explaining the variation production pattern setting table. It is a flowchart explaining a change production switching process. It is a figure showing an example of change of a change production pattern. It is a figure showing an example of change of a change production pattern. It is a figure showing an example of change of a change production pattern. It is a figure showing an example of change of a change production pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect accompanying operation | movement of a sub display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect accompanying operation | movement of a sub display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect accompanying operation | movement of a sub display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect accompanying operation | movement of a sub display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining an auxiliary | assistant game control process. It is a figure explaining an acquisition point selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of an auxiliary | assistant game. It is a figure which shows an example of an auxiliary | assistant game. It is a figure which shows an example of an auxiliary | assistant game. It is a figure which shows an example of an auxiliary | assistant game. It is a flowchart explaining a prior determination command reception process. It is a flowchart explaining a prior (prefetching) production setting process. It is a figure explaining the content of a holding | maintenance (start) storage area. It is a figure explaining a special reservation notice mode distribution table. It is a figure explaining a normal suspension notice mode distribution table. It is a flowchart explaining a prior (prefetching) production execution process. It is a flowchart explaining a special reservation advance notice execution process. It is a figure explaining the table for determining the necessity of an effect addition. It is a figure which shows an example of a special reservation notice. It is a figure which shows an example of a special reservation notice. It is a flowchart explaining continuous notice execution processing. It is a flowchart explaining a normal suspension notice execution process. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuous notice and a normal hold notice. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuous notice and a normal hold notice. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the sub display apparatus in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement aspect of the sub display apparatus in a 2nd modification. It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of 2nd Embodiment from the front side. It is a rear view of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the frame part with which the gaming machine of the second embodiment is provided. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which removed the curtain board speaker unit from the main body frame from the front side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a curtain plate speaker unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the curtain plate member from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the back box member in the state by which the lower speaker was arrange | positioned inside from the front side. It is sectional drawing of a curtain board speaker unit. It is a figure for demonstrating the positional relationship of a curtain board speaker unit and the out tank apparatus with which island equipment is provided. It is a figure for demonstrating the positional relationship of a curtain board speaker unit and a front frame. It is a figure for demonstrating the positional relationship of a curtain board speaker unit and an operation part. It is a front view of each unit attached to the front surface of a glass frame main body. It is an exploded front view of a movable effect device (right frame effect device). It is a figure for demonstrating a drive part. FIG. 94 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 93. It is a figure for demonstrating the state of a movable production | presentation member. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the state of a movable production | presentation member, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the modification of a movable production | presentation member. It is a figure for demonstrating an example in the case of performing production | presentation operation | movement by a movable production | presentation apparatus in conjunction with the sound of a speaker. It is a figure for demonstrating an example in the case of performing production | presentation operation | movement by a movable production | presentation apparatus in conjunction with the sound of a speaker. It is a figure for demonstrating an example in the case of performing production | presentation operation | movement by a movable production | presentation apparatus in conjunction with the sound of a speaker. It is a front view of the game board with which the gaming machine of the second embodiment is provided. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member with which the game machine of 2nd Embodiment is provided from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the back surface constituent member with which the game machine of a 2nd embodiment is provided from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the holding | maintenance display unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation effect unit from the front side. (A) is a front view of a rotation effect unit, (b) is sectional drawing which followed the YY line of Fig.106 (a). (A) is the exploded perspective view which looked at the movable unit from the front side, (b) is the exploded perspective view which looked at the movable unit from the back side. It is a figure explaining the sliding operation to the up-down direction of a movable unit. It is a flowchart explaining the prior (prefetching) effect setting process of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure explaining an example of a hold notice action distribution table, (b) is a figure explaining an example of a hold notice mode distribution table. It is a flowchart explaining a prior (prefetching) production execution process. It is a flowchart explaining a hold notice execution process. It is a figure which shows an example of a hold notice. It is a figure which shows an example of a hold notice. It is a figure which shows another example of a hold notice. It is a figure which shows another example of a hold notice. It is a figure which shows another example of a hold notice. It is a figure for demonstrating a hold display unit. It is a figure for demonstrating a hold display unit. It is a figure for demonstrating a hold display unit.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 via a hinge 13 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, an illuminating device (moving light) 16 incorporating a lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a dispensing abnormality are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15. On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, there are provided a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12.

  In addition, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a ball payout device provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out. There are provided a tray ball outlet 22, a lower plate 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a ball hitting device, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 is provided on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. The effect button 25 forms an operation unit with a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from a player. Furthermore, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player turns the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to be played on the game area 32 (see FIG. 2). Further, when the player operates the effect button 25, an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in relation to the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) in the main display device 41 (see FIG. 2). Can be performed. Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when a player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card to be discharged from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for operating the balance, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  The game board 30 is configured by attaching various members to the front surface and the back surface of a flat game board main body 30a. The game board main body 30a may be made of an opaque material (for example, wood), or may be made of a transparent material (for example, a transparent resin). On the surface of the game board main body 30a, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, an enclosing frame (center case) 40 having a main display device 41 capable of displaying a main effect accompanying the progress of the game is arranged in the approximate center. The main display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the surrounding frame body 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the surrounding frame body 40. That is, the surrounding frame body 40 surrounds the display area of the main display device 41, protrudes forward from the display unit 41 a of the main display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32. .

  The main display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display unit 41a), information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the production effect is displayed. The On the display screen of the main display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  Furthermore, a sub display device 801 capable of displaying an auxiliary effect of the main effect is disposed in the recess provided in the surrounding frame body 40. The sub display device 801 includes a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), and can display an image on at least the surface. The sub display device 801 is disposed in front of the main display device 41, and is located on the right side of the main display device 41 from the standby area 830 that does not overlap with the main display device 41, and the main display device 41. It can be moved to a position where it overlaps with the front and rear, and can be rotated so as to reverse the front and back.

  On the left side of the surrounding frame 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the surrounding frame body 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the surrounding frame body 40. In each of the general winning openings 35,..., A winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 21) for detecting a game ball won in each general winning opening 35 is disposed.

  Also, a first special figure 1 start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) for providing a start condition of the special figure changing display game is provided below the surrounding frame body 40. And a pair of movable members 37b, 37b for converting into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in, and an ordinary variable winning device (general power) 37 having a second start winning opening is provided therein. Yes.

  The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is normally held in a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the start winning port 36 is provided above the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, it is opened in a reverse “C” shape by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 21) as a drive device, and a normal variation prize is awarded. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which a game ball easily flows.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first special variable winning device (large winning port) 38 and a second special variable winning device that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. (Big prize opening) 39.

  The first special variable winning device 38 is disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and a special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. As a result of this, the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) is changed to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 21) as a driving device. By converting the closed prize opening from the closed state to the opened state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of gaming balls into the winning prize opening, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. In addition, a count switch 38a (see FIG. 21) serving as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening is disposed in the first special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 (winning area). Has been. Below the first special variable winning device 38, there is provided an out port 32a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  The second special variation winning device 39 is disposed on the upper left side of the surrounding frame body 40. The second special variation winning device 39 includes a pair of movable members 39c and 39c (see FIG. 3). The pair of movable members 39c, 39c of the second special variation prize winning device 39 is normally held in a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. However, a restriction wall 39d extends above the second special variable winning device 39 so that a game ball cannot be won in the closed state. Then, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked state unfavorable for the player) is changed to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes a special prize opening that is opened and closed by a pair of movable members 39c and 39c driven by a big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 21) as a driving device, for example. During the state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state of the reverse “C” shape, and the player is given a predetermined game value ( Award ball). Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 21) serving as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is disposed in the second special variable winning apparatus (large winning opening) 39 (winning area). Has been.

  The left part of the surrounding frame body 40 is provided with a second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 (third starting start winning opening) that opens toward the left. The game ball won in the second special figure 1 start winning port 641 is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10 through the flow path 772 of the winning ball effect device 770 provided in the surrounding frame body 40. In this process, the game ball acts on the swing effect member 776 provided on the surrounding frame body 40 to swing it, and the effect associated with winning a prize in the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641. Have been able to run. Also, a warp device 610 that opens toward the left is provided on the left side of the surrounding frame 40 and below the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641. The game ball that has flowed into the warp device 610 flows into the stage 621 formed on the lower inner peripheral surface of the surrounding frame body 40, and flows down to the game area 32 below the surrounding frame body 40 through the stage 621 portion.

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (for example, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 that form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for executing a common figure variable display game triggered by winning a prize at one place.

  The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) for the normal figure fluctuation display game constituted by the LED lamp, and the LED lamp. And a memory display unit for informing the start memory number of each variable display game configured. Further, the collective display device 50 is turned on when a big hit occurs, and a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state indicator) that notifies the occurrence of the big hit, and turns on when a short time state occurs to notify the occurrence of the short time state. A second game state display unit (second game state display), a probability state display unit (third game state display) that displays that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A round display unit for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) is provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the main display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result mode other than the result mode (for example, the numbers “3” and “7”) in a lit state.

  The universal display displays the fact that the light is changing by blinking the lamp during the change. When the game result is “out of”, for example, the lamp is turned off, and when the game result is “hit”, the lamp is turned on to display the game result.

  The special figure 1 on-hold indicator is an undigested ball out of the number of winning balls to the first special figure 1 start winning opening 36 and the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 which are the variation start conditions of the special figure 1 display 51. Displays the number (starting memory number = holding number). Specifically, when the number of hold is “0”, all four lamps are turned off, and when the number of hold is “1”, only lamp 1 is turned on. Further, when the number of holdings is “2”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned on, when the number of holdings is “3”, the lamps 1, 2 and 3 are turned on, and when the number of holdings is “4”, 4 is set. All the lamps 1 to 4 are turned on. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the starting memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, as the special figure 1 hold indicator. Display in the same way.

  The general map hold indicator displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the general map start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general map indicator. For example, when the hold number is “0”, the lamps 1 and 2 are turned off, and when the hold number is “1”, only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of hold is “2”, lamps 1 and 2 are turned on. When the number of hold is “3”, lamp 1 is blinked, lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of hold is “4”. Lamps 1 and 2 are blinked.

  For example, the first game state indicator turns off the lamp in a normal gaming state and turns on the lamp when a big hit has occurred. For example, the second gaming state indicator turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp when the time-short state occurs.

  The probability state display unit turns off the lamp when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, for example, and when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Turns on the lamp.

  For example, the round display unit turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit when the big hit occurs. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , The first special figure 1 start winning opening 36, the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641, the normal variable winning apparatus 37 or the special variable winning apparatus 38, 39, or an out provided at the bottom of the game area 32 It flows into the mouth 32a and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first special figure 1 starting winning opening 36, the second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatuses 38 and 39, the winning prize won. The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of mouth is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 21).

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 21) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The number of memorized universal start prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold display of the collective display device 50. In addition, in the normal chart start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining a hit error of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored, and when the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value In addition, a specific result mode (a general map specifying result) is derived by winning the normal map change display game.

  The usual map variation display game is executed by a variation display unit (common diagram display) provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general and normal symbols) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information is displayed by blinking this LED. The fluctuation display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result. Note that, for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, and the like may be used as the normal identification information, which is displayed by variably displaying for a predetermined time and then stopped. If the stop display of the normal map change display game results in the normal map specifying result, it becomes a hit of the normal map, and the pair of movable members 37b of the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is in a predetermined time (for example, if the normal map low probability state). 0.3 seconds x 1 time, or 0.8 seconds x 3 times in the normal high probability state). This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  When the random number value extracted at the time of detection of the passage to the universal figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure indicator stops in the hit state and enters the hit state. At this time, in the normal variation winning device 37, the built-in power solenoid 37c (see FIG. 21) is driven, so that the movable member 37b has a predetermined time (for example, 0.3% in the normal low probability state). 1 time per second, or 0.8 seconds x 3 times in the normal high probability state), and the game ball is allowed to win. It should be noted that the movable member 37b may be set not to be released in the normal low probability state (probability per normal figure is 0), or may be released for 5 seconds with a lower probability than the probability of releasing for 0.3 seconds. You may let them.

  The winning balls to the first special figure 1 start winning opening 36 and the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 are respectively detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 3 switch 644 provided therein, and the normal variation winning apparatus. The winning ball to 37 is detected by a start port 2 switch 37a provided inside. The game balls that have won the first special figure 1 start winning opening 36 and the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 are detected as the start winning balls of the first special figure variable display game, and a predetermined upper limit number ( For example, the game balls that have been stored up to 4) are detected as start winning balls for the second special figure variable display game, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, the second starting memory) is stored. 4)). In addition, when the starting winning ball is detected, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted, and the extracted random number value is stored in a special figure in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 21). Each area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display section (the special figure 1 hold indicator, the special figure 2 hold indicator) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the surrounding frame body. Forty main display devices 41 also display the hold display 47 (see FIG. 44).

  The game control device 100 is configured to display the special figure 1 indicator 51 on the basis of winning in the first special figure 1 starting prize port 36, the second special figure 1 starting prize port 641 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure fluctuation display game is played by the (fluctuation display apparatus) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display apparatus). The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a special display variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the main display device (image display device) 41 corresponding to each special view variation display game. Is to be executed. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the main display device 41 is also a special result mode.

  For example, in the special display variation display game on the main display device 41, the special display symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers or the like on the main display device 41 is displayed on the left variation display area 42a (first special design), and the right variation is displayed. In each of the display area 42c (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area 42b (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left change display area 42a, the right change display area 42c, and the middle change display area 42b, and the left change display area 42a, the right change display area 42c, and the middle change display are displayed. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game in the result mode constituted by the identification information stopped and displayed in each of the areas 42b. In addition, the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801 display various effects such as display of characters and information for improving interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the main display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the main display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is supposed to be executed.

  Further, the first special figure 1 start winning opening 36 and the second special figure in a state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the start memory number is 0. When a game ball wins a one-start winning port 641 (or the normal variable winning device 37), the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, and the start memory number is incremented by one, and the start memory is immediately stored. Based on this, the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is subtracted by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball wins in the first special figure 1 start winning port 36 and the second special figure 1 start winning port 641 (or the normal variable winning device 37), If the start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number becomes 1 or more, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state) (End), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the first special figure 1 start winning opening 36, the start opening 3 switch 644 in the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641, an ordinary variable winning apparatus. The start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches 38a and 39a in 37 have a coil for magnetic detection, and a game is utilized by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a sphere is used. Further, the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like are micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

  Next, the detailed structure of the surrounding frame (center case) 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. The surrounding frame body 40 includes a back surface component (control unit) 700 including the main display device 41 and the like, and a front surface component (front decoration unit) 600 attached to the front surface of the back surface component 700. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the front structural member 600 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member 600 viewed from the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front structural member 600 includes a base frame member 601 having a frame shape in which an opening 600 a is formed, and is configured by attaching various members to the base frame member 601. The base frame member 601 is formed in a peripheral wall 602 inserted into an opening (opening window portion) penetrating in the front-rear direction formed in the game board main body 30a, and formed at a front end of the peripheral wall 602 perpendicular to the peripheral wall 602. A plate-like (flange-shaped) front wall 603 and a decorative armor portion 604 (ingress) that is formed so as to protrude forward of the front wall 603 and restricts the inflow of game balls from the game area 32 to the opening 600a side. Regulatory Department).

  Of the front wall 603, the portion formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 602 is the periphery of the opening when the front component 600 is inserted into the opening formed in the game board main body 30a from the front side. The rear surface of the game board main body 30a comes into contact with the front surface of the game board main body 30a. Accordingly, the front structural member 600 with respect to the game board main body 30a is arranged at a predetermined front and rear position. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in this portion, and the front structural member 600 can be fixed to the game board main body 30a by screws.

  Further, a part of the front wall 603 is arranged on the front side of the game board main body 30a so as to be visible to the player, and the front is decorated. In addition, the front wall 603 is further formed with screw holes, screwing portions, positioning bosses, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. It has become.

  The decorative armor portion 604 includes a portion in which the lower stage 621 of the base frame member 601 is provided, a portion in which the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 and the warp device 610 that are continuous to the left are provided, and an upper first portion. Except for the second special variable prize apparatus attachment portion 605 provided with the two special variable prize apparatus 39, it is formed so as to surround the opening 600a.

  This decorative armor portion 604 is more forward than the front wall 603 by the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the width from the front surface of the game board main body 30a to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30). It is supposed to extend to. Therefore, by attaching the front structural member 600 to a predetermined position of the game board main body 30a, the decorative armor portion 604 positioned in front of the front wall 603 extends into the game area 32, and a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is obtained. Inflow to the opening 600a side is restricted. As a result, the visibility of the main display device 41 can be ensured and the number of game balls flowing into the stage 621 can be limited. That is, an area surrounded by the decorative armor portion 604 that is the inside of the base frame member 601 forms an entry restriction area where entry of game balls is restricted.

  Similarly to the decorative armor portion 604, a decorative portion 606 extending forward from the front wall 603 by the front-rear width of the game area 32 is formed at the lower right portion of the base frame. Between the armor portion 604, an inter-decoration portion flow path 607 is formed for flowing down the game ball flowing down the game area 32 on the right side of the surrounding frame body 40.

  A warp device 610 provided on the left side of the base frame member 601 has an inlet 611 opened to the left for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the surrounding frame body 40, and the inlet 611. There is a cylindrical warp channel that guides the inflowing game ball to the stage, and the game ball that has flowed down the warp channel is guided to the left end of the stage 621.

  The stage 621 is formed by the upper surface of the stage member 620 attached to the base frame member 601. This stage 621 has a predetermined front-rear width that allows the game ball to roll, and has an inclined surface in which both the left and right sides descend toward the center, and is disposed immediately above the first special figure 1 start winning opening 36. The central part is formed in a substantially W-shape projecting upward. The center portion of the stage 621 protrudes upward, but is lower than the left and right ends. In the stage 621 formed in a substantially W shape, an inclined surface 622 is formed on the lowest portion located on both sides of the center portion projecting upward. Due to the inclined surface 622, the game ball whose flow down has weakened on the stage 621 flows down to the game area 32.

  In addition, a guide recess 623 that guides the game ball forward is formed on the front side of the portion protruding upward in the substantially W-shaped stage 621. The game ball on the stage 621 rolls to the left and right without falling into the guide recess 623 when the momentum to roll to the left and right is strong, but the game ball that has just fallen into the guide recess 623 is weakened at this part To be guided to. An annular passage portion 624 is formed in front of the guide recess 623 and has an inner diameter that allows a game ball to pass therethrough. The game ball that has passed through the passage portion 624 receives the first special figure 1 start prize. It is guided directly above the mouth 36.

  A partition wall member 630 is attached to the base frame member 601 behind the stage member 620. The partition wall member 630 is a transparent partition wall 631 (transparent panel portion) that partitions a region where the game ball on the stage 621 rolls and an opening 600a of the front component member 600 at a portion located behind the stage 621. Is provided. In addition, a holding portion 632 for holding the warp device 610 is formed on the left side as viewed from the front side of the partition wall member 630, and further, the warp device 610 and the second special figure 1 start winning port 641 are formed on the left end. A regulation wall 633 is formed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the opening 600a from between the two.

  Above the warp device 610 in the base frame member 601, a start port forming member 640 that forms the second special figure 1 start winning port 641 is attached. The start opening forming member 640 has a second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 opened leftward for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the surrounding frame body 40, and the second special figure 1 start winning prize. A cylindrical flow path 642 for guiding the game ball flowing into the opening 641 into the opening 600a is provided. Further, a switch mounting portion 643 is formed in the middle of the flow path 642, and a start port 3 switch 644 for detecting the inflowing game ball is mounted on the switch mounting portion 643. The downstream end of the flow path 642 is connected to the upstream end of the flow path 772 in the winning ball effect device 770 provided on the back surface component 700, and flows into the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641. The game ball is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine through the flow path 642 and the flow path 772.

  In addition, a second special variation winning device 39 is attached to the upper left portion of the base frame member 601. As described above, the second special variation winning device 39 includes the pair of movable members 39c and 39c. A large winning opening solenoid 39b is provided as a driving device for opening and closing the movable members 39c and 39c. The pair of movable members 39c, 39c are in a closed state with an interval of about the diameter of the game ball when in the closed state, but from the upper side to the right side of the portion having an interval of about the diameter of the game ball. A regulating wall 39d is provided so as to surround the outer periphery, so that game balls cannot flow in the closed state. Further, in the closed state, the restriction wall 39d and the left movable member 39c are arranged so as to be continuous with the decorative armor portion 604 that is interrupted by the second special variable prize apparatus attaching portion 605, and integrated with the decorative armor portion 604. This prevents the game ball from entering the opening 600a.

  When the pair of movable members 39c and 39c are in an open state and are opened in a reverse “C” shape, a game ball can flow in between the left movable members 39c and 39c and the left end of the regulating wall 39d. . In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 21) as a detecting means for detecting an inflowing game ball is disposed in the second special variable winning device (large winning opening) 39 (winning area). The game ball that has flowed into the second special fluctuation winning device 39 is guided to the stored ball effect device 730 disposed on the back surface component 700, and is used for the effect of the special figure change display game.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back surface component 700 includes a control base unit 710 having a recessed chamber that opens forward. Further, below the control base unit 710, a switch base unit 790 for detecting and discharging game balls won in various winning holes is arranged. Further, a display control unit 840 including a main display device 41 is disposed behind the control base unit 710, and the main display device 41 is opened from a window portion 721 formed on the rear wall of the control base member 720 of the control base unit 710. The display part 41a is made visible.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the control base unit 710 has a recessed chamber that opens forward, and a control base member 720 that has a window portion 721 that allows the display portion 41 a of the main display device 41 at the rear to be visible. It is comprised by attaching various members to this control base member 720. In the recessed chamber of the control base member 720, the ball storage unit 740 that performs an effect by the game ball won in the second special variation winning device 39 and the storage ball effect device 730 including the ball effect unit 750 and the winning ball effect device 770 are discharged. A discharge ball passage member 780 for guiding the game ball to be played to the switch base unit 790 is disposed. Also, in the concave chamber of the control base member 720, a winning ball effect device 770 capable of guiding the game ball won to the second special figure 1 start winning port 641 and producing an effect by the swing effect member 776, and a sub display device 801. A sub-display unit 800 including

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the stored ball effect device 730 stores the game balls that have flowed into the second special fluctuation winning device 39 and discharges them from the ball storage unit 740 and discharges them at a predetermined timing. And a ball effect unit 750 that performs a ball effect according to the rolling mode of the game balls.

  The ball storage unit 740 includes an introduction flow path 741 that provides an introduction port 741a that receives a game ball won in the second special variation winning device 39, a storage flow path 742 that stores game balls introduced from the introduction flow path 741, and storage. A lead-out channel 743 for guiding game balls discharged from the channel 742 and an overflow channel 744 for discharging game balls that cannot be stored in the storage channel 742 are provided. Each of these channels is a cylindrical channel through which game balls can flow down in a row.

  The introduction flow path 741 is arranged to open upward at a position below the second special variable winning device 39 so that the introduction port 741a communicates with a discharge port provided in the second special variable winning device 39. . Then, the game ball is extended so as to flow down from here to the left, and the game ball is guided to a storage flow path 742 arranged vertically to the left of the window portion 721 (FIG. 2). FIG. 5).

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, the storage channel 742 includes a storage control mechanism 745 for controlling storage and release of game balls at the downstream end. The storage control mechanism 745 includes a stopper member 745b that is operated in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the storage flow path 742 by a storage control solenoid 745a. The stopper member 745b is moved into the storage channel 742 from the opening 742a formed in the storage channel 742 as shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, it can be converted into an allowable state in which the game ball is allowed to flow away from the storage channel 742, whereby the storage and release of the game ball are controlled. Further, a sensor housing portion 746 is formed immediately above the portion of the storage channel 742 where the storage control mechanism 745 is provided, and a storage ball sensor 746a for detecting the presence or absence of a storage ball is provided here. The arrangement position of the storage ball sensor 746a is a position where the game ball located on the most downstream side among the storage balls can be detected.

  In other words, the second special variation winning device 39 forms a ball entrance through which game balls flowing down the game area 32 can flow. In addition, the storage flow path 742 serves as a ball storage section that can receive and store the game balls that have flowed into the entrance and discharge the stored game balls. In addition, the storage ball sensor 746a forms part of a storage determination unit that can determine whether or not a game ball is stored in the ball storage unit.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, a branch portion 742 b with the overflow channel 744 is provided at the upstream end of the storage channel 742, and game balls that cannot be stored in the storage channel 742 go to the overflow channel 744. It is supposed to be guided. In addition, the length from the portion where the storage control mechanism 745 is provided in the storage flow path 742 to the branching portion 742b can store the number of game balls (for example, 6) necessary for use in the production of the special figure variation display game. It is said to be long. As shown in FIG. 5, the game ball that has flowed into the overflow channel 744 is guided to the outside of the gaming machine 10 via the switch base unit 790. In addition, the outlet channel 743 is extended so as to guide the game ball to the right from the downstream end of the storage channel 742, and the downstream end of the outlet channel 743 is played in the ball display channel 751 of the ball effect unit 750. Open to let the sphere flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the ball effect unit 750 is disposed on the upper part of the discharge ball channel member 780 disposed on the lower inner peripheral surface of the control base member 720. The position where the ball effect unit 750 is disposed is a position in front of the lower center of the main display device 41, and is made of a transparent material disposed in front of the lower portion of the main display device 41 as shown in FIG. The position is behind the partition wall 631 and is visible from the front through the partition wall 631. As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, this ball effect unit 750 includes an effect stage member 760 that forms a flow path of game balls discharged from the ball storage unit 740, an effect rotation body 753 that distributes game balls, and an effect. And a drive mechanism 755 that rotationally drives the rotating body 753.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the effect stage member 760 includes a base portion 761 that is curved in an arc shape and a rotating body attaching portion 766 that is formed so as to protrude above the base portion 761. In the front portion of the upper surface of the base portion 761, a ball-showing flow path 751 for guiding the game ball led out from the lead-out flow path 743 of the ball storage unit 740 down from the left end to the central portion where the rotating body mounting portion 766 is formed. Is formed. The ball-showing channel 751 has a rear wall formed by a first guide wall 762 erected so as to extend from the front end of the base portion 761 to the left and right with a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game ball discharged from 743 is guided to the right along the arcuate inclined surface. The base portion 761 is arranged so that the front end is in contact with the partition wall 631 (transparent panel portion) of the partition wall member 630 attached to the rear of the stage member 620, and the front wall of the ball-showing flow path 751 is the partition wall. 631.

  In addition, at the position in front of the rotating body mounting portion 766 that is the downstream end of the ball-showing flow path 751, the effect rotating body 753 is attached to the rotating body mounting portion 766 with the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down to the right. An arc-shaped second guide wall 763 that is converted to the rear toward the rear is erected. The game ball guided by the second guide wall 763 flows into a sorting area 764 formed in front of the rotating body mounting portion 766.

  The distribution area 764 is an area surrounded by the rotating body mounting portion 766, the first guide wall 762, and the partition 765. In this distribution area 764, a distribution channel 764b extending along the front-rear direction from an inflow portion 764a into which a game ball guided by the second guide wall 763 flows, and the right and left of the distribution channel 764b are formed. And a discharge port 764c. Further, a specific inflow port 767a formed in the rotating body mounting portion 766 is located behind the distribution channel 764b, and the game balls that have flowed into the distribution area 764 are discharged from the discharge port 764c and the specific inflow port 767a. It flows into either one. The distribution channel 764b has an inclination that descends backward from the inflow portion 764a, and also has an inclination that gently falls to the left and right with respect to the center, so that the game ball that has flowed into the distribution area 764 returns to the ball display channel 751. And no stopping in the distribution area 764.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the rotating body mounting portion 766 is formed so as to protrude from the central rear portion on the base portion 761. The rotating body mounting portion 766 is formed with a rotating body accommodating portion 767 that accommodates the columnar effect rotating body 753, and a rotating body holding that rotatably holds the effect rotating body 753 behind the rotating body accommodating portion 767. A portion 768 is formed. As shown in FIG. 11, the rotating body accommodating portion 767 and the rotating body holding portion 768 have a rotating shaft 754 of the effect rotating body 753 along the front-rear direction, and the rotating shaft 754 of the effect rotating body 753 and the distribution channel 764b. And the center line along the extending direction (the direction along the front-rear direction of the gaming machine) are formed so as to be located in the same vertical plane.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the rotator accommodating portion 767 is formed in an arcuate shape that matches the shape of the effect rotator 753, and a specific inflow port 767 a is formed at the bottom of the arcuate recess. . Further, a specific ball sensor 752 for detecting a game ball flowing into the specific inflow port 767a is attached. The rotator holding portion 768 is formed in a disc shape that can cover the rear surface of the effect rotator 753, and a bearing portion 768a that inserts and holds the rotation shaft of the effect rotator 753 is formed at the center. In addition, an LED substrate 769 having a plurality of LEDs 769a radially arranged around the bearing portion 768a is attached to the front surface of the rotating body holding portion 768, and the effect rotating body 753 made of a material that can transmit light is disposed behind the rotating body holding portion 768. It is designed to be able to produce a light effect by illuminating.

  The effect rotation body 753 is formed in a columnar shape, and is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 754 along the front-rear direction passing through the center (see FIGS. 11 and 12). An inflow allowable recess 753a that is recessed in a notch shape toward the center is formed at a position facing the center of the front surface of the effect rotating body 753. The inflow permitting recess 753a is formed in a size that can accommodate a game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the state where the inflow permitting concave portion 753a is vertically opposed to the specific inflow port 767a and is opposed to the specific inflow port 767a, inflow of the game ball flowing down rearward in the sorting channel 764b to the specific inflow port 767a is permitted. The That is, this state is an allowable state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, inflow of the game ball to the specific inflow port 767a is restricted when the inflow allowable recess 753a does not coincide with the specific inflow port 767a. That is, this state is a restricted state. That is, by rotating the effect rotating body 753, the permissible state and the restricted state can be switched. Therefore, the inflow restricting member that the effect rotating body 753 can convert into a restricted state that restricts the inflow of game balls into the specific area (specific inflow port 767a) and an allowable state that allows the inflow of game balls into the specific area. Make.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the drive mechanism 755 includes a drive motor 756, a main gear 755a attached to a drive shaft 756a of the drive motor 756, and a driven gear 755b that is rotationally driven by the main gear 755a. The driven gear 755b is arranged on the back surface side of the rotating body holding portion 768, and a rotation shaft 754 of the effect rotating body 753 is attached to the center, and the effect rotating body 753 is rotated by driving the drive motor 756. It can be driven.

  The stored ball effect device 730 having such a configuration stores the game ball that has flowed into the second special fluctuation winning device 39 in the storage flow path 742 of the ball storage unit 740. Then, the storage control solenoid 745a is operated based on the operation of the effect button 25 at a predetermined timing according to the progress of the special figure variation display game, and one stored game ball is discharged to the ball effect unit 750. Is done. The discharged game ball flows into the sorting area 764 through the ball-showing flow path 751, and flows into the specific inlet 767a or the outlet 764c depending on the operating state of the effect rotating body 753. A predetermined effect is performed in response to the game ball flowing into the specific inflow port 767a. That is, the ball effect unit 750 can perform the ball effect as to whether or not the game ball released from the ball storage unit (storage channel 742) rolls and flows into the specific area (specific inlet 767a). The ball production department.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the winning ball effect device 770 flows down the winning ball channel member 771 and the winning ball channel member 771 for guiding the game ball won to the second special figure 1 start winning port 641. And a rocking effect member 776 for effecting with a game ball. The winning ball channel member 771 has a bent channel 772 formed in a cylindrical shape so that the game balls can flow down in a row. As shown in FIG. 5, the flow path 772 has a front end so that the upstream end 772 a communicates with the downstream end of the flow path 642 of the start port forming member 640 that forms the second special figure 1 start winning port 641. The game ball that has flowed in from here is guided to the vicinity of the main display device 41 and then guided downward.

  As shown in FIG. 13, a rocking effect member 776 that produces an effect by swinging by the action of a game ball flowing down in the flow path 772 is supported at the bent portion of the flow path 772 in the winning ball flow path member 771. A supporting portion 773 is formed. The support portion 773 is formed so as to extend above the flow path 772, and when the winning ball effect device 770 is disposed on the control base member 720, a portion that is closer to the main display device 41 than the flow path 772. Further, a shaft support portion 773a that rotatably supports the swing shaft 777 that is the swing center of the swing effect member 776 is formed. Further, a stopper portion 773b that restricts the swing range of the swing effect member 776 is formed in the vicinity of the shaft support portion 773a.

  In addition, a sensor housing portion 774 is formed immediately below a portion where the flow path 772 of the winning ball flow path member 771 is bent, and a passage detection sensor 774a for detecting a game ball flowing down the flow path 772 is attached thereto. Furthermore, an entrance opening 775 that penetrates the inside and outside of the flow path 772 is located below the sensor housing portion 774 and in the portion that becomes the main display device 41 side when the winning ball effect device 770 is disposed on the control base member 720. Is formed.

  The swing effect member 776 has a shape imitating the shape of a foot. A swing shaft 777 extending rearward along the front-rear direction is disposed on the upper surface of the back surface of the swing effect member 776, and the swing shaft 777 is rotated by the shaft support portion 773 a of the support portion 773. By being supported in such a manner, the swing effect member 776 can swing in the direction along the display portion 41a (display surface) of the main display device 41 around the swing shaft 777. In addition, a ball receiving portion (impact portion) 776a extending to the side is formed in a portion disposed below the swing effect member 776 and on the flow path 772 side. The ball receiving portion 776a can protrude into the flow path through the entry opening 775. Furthermore, a stopper receiving portion 776b that restricts the swing range of the swing effect member 776 by contacting the stopper portion 773b formed on the support portion 773 extends upward at the upper end portion of the swing effect member 776. It is formed as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the swing effect member 776 is in the position of the center of gravity such that the ball receiving portion 776a protrudes into the flow path through the entry opening 775 when not swinging. Then, when the game ball flowing down the flow path 772 collides with the ball receiving portion 776a, a force in a direction away from the flow path 772 is applied to the lower portion of the swing effect member 776, and this causes the swing shaft 777 to move. It swings around the center. As a result, a winning to the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 can be produced by the operation of the swing effect member 776. In addition, when the lower portion of the swing effect member 776 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction away from the flow path 772, the stopper receiving portion 776b comes into contact with the stopper portion 773b and is further rotated in the direction away from the flow path 772. Is to regulate.

  As described above, by swinging the swing effect member 776, it is easy to attract the player's attention, and the effect of winning the game ball can be enhanced. It is possible to make the player effectively recognize that the game ball has flowed into the winning opening where the start memory is generated). In addition, since it operates in the direction along the display surface, it becomes easy for the player to visually recognize the swing operation of the swing effect member 776, and the effect on the display surface is easily matched to the operation of the swing effect member 776.

  That is, the second special figure 1 start winning port 641 forms a ball inflow portion into which a game ball flowing down the game area 32 can flow, and a ball flow path portion in which the flow channel 772 flows down the inflow ball flowing into the ball inflow portion. Make. In addition, the swing effect member 776 is a movable member that can operate in front of the display unit 41a when the inflow ball collides, and the inflow before the start port 3 switch 644 and the passage detection sensor 774a collide with the movable member. A sphere detector capable of detecting a sphere is formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 5, 6, and 15, the discharge ball channel member 780 holds various members, and the game balls discharged from the stored ball effect device 730 and the winning ball effect device 770 are supplied to the switch base unit 790. A guiding channel is formed. As shown in FIG. 6, the center and right side portions of the discharge ball flow path member 780 serve as an arrangement portion 781 in which the ball effect unit 750 is provided, and the upper surface thereof is a circle of the effect stage member 760 in the ball effect unit 750. The arc shape is adapted to the base portion 761 formed in an arc shape. The arrangement portion 781 is formed with an effect ball introduction portion 781a that receives a game ball that has flowed into the specific inflow port 767a and the discharge port 764c of the ball effect unit 750. The effect ball introducing portion 781a has an inclined surface whose bottom surface is lowered to the left so as to guide the received game ball to the left collecting portion 786.

  Further, the left side portion of the discharge ball channel member 780 is a channel forming unit 782 that guides the game balls discharged from the overflow channel 744 of the stored ball effect device 730 and the game balls discharged from the winning ball effect device 770. It is said that. On the upper surface of the flow path forming part 782, a winning ball introduction part 783 for receiving a game ball discharged from the flow path 772 of the winning ball effect producing device 770 is formed, and the downstream end of the flow path 772 is connected to this. It has become so. In addition, an overflow ball introduction part 784 that accepts a game ball discharged from the overflow flow path 744 is formed on the left side of the winning ball introduction part 783 on the upper surface of the flow path formation part 782. The downstream end is connected here.

  The game ball introduced from the overflow ball introduction part 784 flows down the overflow flow path 785 inclined so as to descend to the right, and is guided to the aggregation part 786. In addition, the game ball introduced from the winning ball introduction unit 783 is guided downward, flows into the overflow channel 785, and is guided to the aggregation unit 786. Further, a notch portion 722 is formed on the lower wall of the control base member 720 corresponding to the aggregation portion 786, and the game balls concentrated on the aggregation portion 786 pass through the notch portion 722 as shown in FIG. It flows down to the switch base unit 790.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the switch base unit 790 includes a switch base member 791 for attaching various members and fixing the switch base unit 790 to the back surface of the game board main body 30a. At the left and right end portions and the lower end portion of the switch base member 791, there are formed attachment portions 792 to be joined to the back surface of the game board main body 30a. Further, a relay board and a game control device 100 are attached to the back side of the switch base member 791.

  On the left side of the front surface of the switch base member 791, the game balls that have flowed into the general winning opening 35 provided on the left side from the center of the game board 30 and the game balls from the collecting portion 786 of the discharge ball channel member 780 are flowed down. A left winning ball channel member 793 is attached. In addition, on the right side of the front surface of the switch base member 791, a game ball that has flowed into the general winning opening 35 provided on the right side from the center of the game board 30 and a game ball that has flowed into the normal variation winning device 37 is guided to flow down. A winning ball channel member 794 is attached.

  The left winning ball flow path member 793 flows into the general winning opening 35 corresponding to each of the three general winning openings 35 provided on the left side from the center of the game board 30 and is guided to the back side of the game board 30. An introduction portion 793a that receives the game balls that have been made, and an aggregation flow path 793b that collects and guides the game balls that have flowed into the introduction portions 793a to the outside. The collective flow path 793b is provided with a winning opening switch 35a that detects a game ball flowing down, and thereby a winning at the left general winning opening 35 is detected. The game balls flowing down the aggregation flow path 793b are guided below the switch base unit 790 and guided to the outside of the gaming machine via a discharge flow path (not shown).

  In addition, the left winning ball channel member 793 is formed with a discharge ball channel 793c through which game balls flow from the collecting portion 786 of the discharge ball channel member 780. The discharge ball flow path 793c is arranged so that the upstream end thereof coincides with the lower portion of the notch 722 of the control base member 720, and communicates with the aggregation portion 786 of the discharge ball flow path member 780. The game ball is guided downward from here. This discharge ball flow path 793c is not provided with a sensor for detecting a game ball. The game balls flowing down the discharge ball flow path 793c are guided below the switch base unit 790 and guided to the outside of the gaming machine via a discharge flow path (not shown).

  The right winning ball flow path member 794 flows into the general winning port 35 corresponding to the general winning port 35 provided on the right side from the center of the game board 30 and is guided to the back side of the game board 30. And an induction channel 794b for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the introduction portion 794a to the outside. A winning port switch 35a for detecting a game ball flowing down is provided at a communicating portion between the introduction portion 794a and the guide channel 794b, and thereby a winning to the right general winning port 35 is detected.

  The right winning ball flow path member 794 is formed with a winning ball flow path 794c through which the game ball that has flowed into the normal variation winning device 37 flows down. The winning ball flow path 794c is provided with a start port 2 switch 37a for detecting a flowing game ball, whereby a winning to the normal variation winning device 37 is detected. The winning ball flow path 794c merges with the guidance flow path 794b, and the merged game balls are guided below the switch base unit 790 and guided to the outside of the gaming machine via a discharge flow path (not shown).

  In addition, a storage portion 795 that is recessed rearward to store the rear portion of the first special figure 1 start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning device 38 is formed at the front center portion of the switch base member. ing. The game balls that have flowed into the first special figure 1 start winning port 36 and the first special variable winning device 38 are guided to the lower part of the switch base unit 790 through the flow path in the storage unit 795, and are not shown in the drawing. To the outside of the gaming machine.

  16 to 20, the sub display unit 800 includes a sub display device 801, a rotation drive unit 810 that holds and rotates the sub display device 801, and a slide that holds and rotates the rotation drive unit 810. A mechanism 820. As shown in FIG. 5, the sub display unit 800 is disposed at a predetermined position by attaching the slide mechanism 820 to the upper portion of the concave chamber of the control base member 720.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the sub display device 801 includes a display device such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), and a display unit 802 that displays an image on one surface (front surface) faces. The sub display device 801 has a size capable of shielding one of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c set in the main display device 41 in a state where the front and back sides are directed forward. In addition, the back side of the sub display device 801 facing the front side where the display unit 802 is located is decorated. That is, it is a decorative part. A shaft portion 803 for allowing the sub display device 801 to be rotatably held is formed at an upper end portion of the sub display device 801 so as to extend upward. Above the sub display device 801, a rotation drive unit 810 that holds the shaft portion 803 and rotates the sub display device 801 around the shaft portion 803 is disposed.

  The rotation drive unit 810 accommodates a rotation mechanism that holds and rotates the sub display device 801 in a space formed by the rotation base member 811, the cover member 812, and the lid member 813. The rotation base member 811 has a circular bottom surface 811a, and a peripheral wall 811b extending upward and perpendicular to the bottom surface 811a is formed so as to surround the periphery of the bottom surface 811a. In addition, an insertion portion 811c through which the shaft portion 803 of the sub display device 801 is inserted is formed at the center of the bottom surface 811a.

  The cover member 812 is a cylindrical member that penetrates up and down and has an inner diameter that narrows upward. The cover member 812 is connected to the mounting portion 814b of the drive motor 814 and is used for fixing the drive motor 814. A boss 812a is formed. The lower end portion of the cover member 812 is formed so as to overlap the upper end portion of the peripheral wall 811b of the rotation base member 811. The cover member 812 and the rotation base member 811 are joined by an appropriate joining method such as fitting or screwing. When it does, it joins without a level difference.

  The lid member 813 is formed in the same size as the upper end portion of the cover member 812, and is formed so as to extend vertically upward from the front end portion of the closing portion 813a and the closing portion 813a capable of closing the opening of the upper end portion. Connected portion 813b. A connection receiving portion 813c that joins the connection pin 822b of the slide mechanism 820 is formed on the rear surface of the connection portion 813b, whereby the slide mechanism 820 and the rotation drive portion 810 are connected.

  The rotation mechanism includes a drive motor 814, a rotation member 815 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor 814, and a plurality of bearing balls 816 that facilitate rotation of the rotation member 815 with respect to the rotation base member 811. The rotating member 815 is a disk-shaped member, and a shaft holding portion 815a for inserting and holding the shaft portion 803 of the sub display device 801 is formed at the center. Further, a gear portion 815b centered on the shaft holding portion 815a is formed on the upper surface of the rotating member 815, and the gear portion 815b meshes with the gear 814c of the driving motor 814, so that the rotating member is driven as the driving motor 814 is driven. 815 rotates. A holding portion 815c that rotatably holds the bearing ball 816 is formed on the lower surface of the rotating member 815, and the rotating member 815 is disposed on the bottom surface 811a inside the rotating base member 811 via the bearing ball 816.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the slide mechanism 820 includes a box-shaped slide mechanism base 821 that houses various members therein, a rack member 822 that is connected to the rotation drive unit 810, and a slide drive of the rack member 822. Drive motor 824.

  On the front surface of the slide mechanism base 821, a connecting pin 822b formed on a rack member 822 accommodated therein is exposed forward and extends in the front-rear direction so as to guide left-right movement. A slit portion 821a is formed. The connecting pin 822b exposed forward and the connecting receiving portion 813c formed on the lid member 813 of the rotation driving portion 810 are coupled via the slit portion 821a.

  Further, a panel attachment portion 821b for attaching the decorative panel 825 is formed above the slit portion 821a. The decoration panel 825 attached here has a rectangular plate shape, and is decorated with a decoration (here, the name of a gaming machine, etc.) for decoration of the gaming machine. The decorative panel 825 is attached so as to cover the front of the slit portion 821a, and has a function of preventing the slit portion 821a from being seen by the player. Further, the panel mounting portion 821b is formed so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the slide mechanism base 821, and the connecting portion 813b of the rotation driving portion 810 is provided between the front surface of the slide mechanism base 821 and the back surface of the decorative panel 825. An interval that allows passage of the air is formed. The vicinity of the right end portion of the slit portion 821a is not covered with the decorative panel 825, but is covered with the decorative member of the surrounding frame body 40 so that the player cannot see it (see FIG. 2).

  Further, an insertion hole 821c penetrating left and right is formed on the left side surface of the slide mechanism base 821. The insertion hole 821c is formed in a size that allows the rack member 822 to be inserted, and is exposed to the outside of the slide mechanism base 821 through the insertion hole 821c when the rack member 822 is slid to the left. It is like that. The rack member 822 that protrudes to the left from the insertion hole 821c is positioned behind the second special variable prize-winning device 39 and behind the game board main body 30a so that it cannot be seen by the player. (See FIG. 2).

  The rack member 822 disposed inside the slide mechanism base 821 has a long plate shape, and teeth 822a that mesh with the pinion 824a of the drive motor 824 are formed on one side surface. In addition, a connecting pin 822b for connecting to the rotation drive unit 810 is formed at the end in the extending direction on the surface facing the surface on which the teeth 822a are formed so as to protrude perpendicularly to the surface. . Further, a light shielding plate 822c for enabling the detection sensor 823 to detect the initial position of the rack member 822 is formed at a portion where the connecting pin 822b is formed.

  Inside the slide mechanism base 821, an arrangement portion (not shown) for defining the arrangement position of the rack member 822 and guiding it in the sliding direction is formed. 20, the rack member 822 is disposed so as to extend along the left-right direction so that the surface on which the teeth 822a are formed is the rear surface. Accordingly, the pinion 824a and the teeth 822a of the drive motor 824 are engaged with each other, and the rack member 822 can be slid along the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 824.

  Further, in the state of being arranged at such an arrangement position, the connecting pin 822b formed on the front surface of the rack member 822 is arranged so as to be located at the right end in the extending direction, and further, the slit It is disposed at a position that extends forward of the slide mechanism base 821 through the portion 821a. Further, the insertion hole 821c and the rack member 822 are arranged so that the positions thereof coincide with each other, and the rack member 822 can pass through the insertion hole 821c when the rack member 822 is slid leftward.

  The detection sensor 823 is an optical sensor in which the light emitting unit 823a and the light receiving unit 823b are arranged to face each other, and outputs the presence or absence of detection of light from the light emitting unit 823a in the light receiving unit 823b as a signal. This detection sensor 823 is inside the slide mechanism base 821, and when the rack member 822 is in the initial position which is the right end of the movement range as shown in FIG. 20, the light shielding plate 822c is connected to the light emitting unit 823a and the light receiving unit 823b. It is attached to a position that is placed between them. That is, when the rack member 822 is in the initial position, the light shielding plate 822c is positioned between the light receiving portion 823b and the light emitting portion 823a and cannot detect light, and when the rack member 822 is not in the initial position, the light shielding plate 822c. Is retracted from between the light receiving portion 823b and the light emitting portion 823a, and the light from the light emitting portion 823a can be detected. Accordingly, it is possible to detect whether or not the rack member 822 is in the initial position by the detection sensor 823.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the sub display unit 800 having the above-described configuration is in the initial state in which the sub display device 801 is on the right side of the main display device 41 with the display unit 802 facing the front side. It is arranged in a standby area 830 formed so as not to overlap the apparatus 41 in the front-rear direction. In this state, the slide mechanism 820 is in a state in which the rack member 822 is arranged at the initial position, and the rotation driving unit 810 is in a state in which the sub display device 801 is arranged in the initial position. Then, the sub display device 801 is moved to the left together with the rotation drive unit 810 by the slide mechanism 820 as shown in FIG. It is possible to make it the state which overlaps in front. Furthermore, the sub display device 801 can be rotated by the rotation drive unit 810 so as to reverse the front and back in front of the main display device 41. The movement by the slide mechanism 820 and the rotation by the rotation driving unit 810 can be controlled independently, and various operations can be realized by combining these operations. For example, since the sub display device 801 can be reversed upside down at the destination, it is possible to efficiently improve the effect of the display by the sub display device 801 and enhance the interest of the game.

  Here, the area of the standby area 830 is such that the sub-display device 801 cannot be rotated and the front side and the back side cannot be reversed. The rotation drive unit 810 is controlled to rotate after moving. By doing so, the area of the standby area 830 can be reduced, and the space of the game board 30 can be used efficiently. The standby area 830 may be rotated within the standby area 830 so that the sub display device 801 can be rotated to reverse the front side and the back side.

  That is, the slide mechanism 820 serves as a moving unit that can move the sub display device 801 in front of the display unit 41 a of the main display device 41. Further, the rotation driving unit 810 serves as a front / back reversing unit that can reverse the front side and the back side of the sub display device 801 at a position after the movement by the moving unit (slide mechanism 820). In addition, it can be said that the rotation drive unit 810 forms a state conversion unit that can convert the sub display device 801 into a first state in which the front side is visible and a second state in which the back side is visible.

  Although the communication lines connected to the sub display device 801 are not shown, it is preferable to arrange them so that they are not visible to the player. For example, wiring connected to the back surface of the display portion 802 is disposed in a space formed by the cover member 812 and the lid member 813 through a space formed in the shaft portion 803. Furthermore, from here, it arrange | positions to the back side of the connection part 813b through the insertion hole formed in the closing part 813a in the cover member 813, and it arrange | positions to the back side of the game board 30 through the slit part 821a.

  FIG. 21 is a block diagram of a control system of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 including an input port, an output unit 130 including an output port and a driver, and the like.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and a signal from the interface chip (I / F) 121 connected to the proximity switch in the input unit 120 (start winning detection signal). Is provided with an inverter 112 such as an inverter that logically inverts the signal and input to the gaming microcomputer 111 and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the internal RAM of gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. . Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed, and an individual IC register 111D.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a second half variation pattern table and a first half variation pattern table.

  Reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can change, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state advantageous to the player (special game state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state where so-called variable display by a plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c (so-called full rotation reach) is maintained while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c satisfy the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device in correspondence with the special figure fluctuation display game is a plurality of predetermined times in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c in the display device. If the identification information is variably displayed and then the variability display is stopped in the order of left, right and middle and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variability display areas 42a and 42c become the special result mode. A state where the variable display is stopped in a state where the condition is satisfied (for example, the same identification information) is a reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display in all the variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the variable display areas of the left, middle, and right is satisfied. For example, the state where the same identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state. This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (reliability is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), special 4 reach (SP4 reach, premier reach), etc. are set. The reliability increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <special 4 reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 is a jackpot determining random number for the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various reach and reach). A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation display game in a variation display with no change), a random number for determining a hit of a normal variation display game, and the like from the oscillation circuit 113 Based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal), a clock generator is provided that generates a timer interrupt signal for a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

  In addition, the CPU 111A selects one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) or a special figure routine process (step A9) in a special figure game process to be described later. One fluctuation pattern table is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operation state (normal operation state or short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. To do. In addition, the gaming microcomputer 111 outputs the ID stored in the individual ID register 111D from the information transmission unit 71 at the time of power-on, at the occurrence of an event such as a big hit, or when the fraud is detected by a magnet or radio wave.

  Although not shown, the payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control for paying out a prize ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball. In addition, the payout control device 200 outputs a launch permission signal that permits the launch of the game ball to the launch control device 201 that controls the launch device on the condition that it is electrically connected to the card unit.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the first special figure 1 start winning port 36, a start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, and a second special figure 1 start winning port 641. The start port 3 switch 644, the gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches 38a and 39a are connected via the proximity I / F 121. When the connected switch is a proximity switch, the proximity I / F 121 receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. It is an interface chip that converts to Proximity I / F 121 seems to be floating because the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the proximity switch is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. An abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  All the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are supplied to the second input port 122 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140, and also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. It is like that. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 644 are supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the second input port 122 and the inverting circuit 112. Is configured to be input to. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 is assumed to receive a signal from a microswitch or the like, and is detected as a negative logic, that is, a low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  Therefore, when using a micro switch as the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 644, the detection signal is directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. can do. That is, when it is desired to directly input negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 644 to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  Further, the input unit 120 includes a start winning opening 36 converted by signals from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the proximity I / F 121. The start port 1 switch 36a in the inside, the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the start port 3 switch 644 in the second special figure 1 start winning port 641, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a , 39a and a second input port 122 is provided for supplying to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The data held in the second input port 122 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 122. be able to. The same applies to other ports described later.

  Further, the input unit 120 receives signals and payouts from the front frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the game frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating a payout abnormality from the control device 200, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are fetched and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 123 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 124 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. The circuit 124 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 123 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 124 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs a 4-bit data signal output to the payout control device 200, a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data, and a data strobe signal SSTB output to the effect control device 300. 1 and a second output port 132 for generating an 8-bit data signal to be output to the effect control device 300. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 by parallel communication. In addition, the data strobe signal from the first output port 131 is provided to the output unit 130 so that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300, that is, to ensure one-way communication. A unidirectional buffer 133 that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the SSTB and the second output port 132 is provided. A buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 200.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 134 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 134 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 134.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the vibration sensor switch 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 134 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 134 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special variable winning device 38 (large winning port solenoid) 38b and the solenoid that opens the second special variable winning device 39 (large winning port solenoid). 39b, the opening / closing data of the solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 and the on / off data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 are output. A third output port 135 for output, a fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, game such as jackpot information 5th output port 13 for outputting the information regarding the machine 10 to the information transmission part (external information terminal board) 71 It is provided. Information relating to the gaming machine 10 output from the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (not shown) installed in a game store.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the big prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the third output port 135, receives the solenoid driving signal and the opening / closing data signal of the general-purpose solenoid 37c, and outputs the solenoid driving signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs, a second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the port 136, and an external information signal that is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the third driver 138c that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the second driver 138b for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs 12 V, and drawing the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the information transmission unit (external information terminal board) 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 134, the third output port 135, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 1000. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection apparatus 1000 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 122 and 123 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 formed of an amusement chip (IC), as with the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU 311. , VDP (Video Display Processor) 313 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801 in accordance with commands and data from the 2nd CPU 312 and various melody and sound effects. A sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound to be reproduced from the speakers (sound output units) 19a and 19b is provided.

  The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are connected to program ROMs 321 and 322 each composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by each CPU. Is connected to an image ROM 323 storing character images and video data, and an audio ROM 324 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation, instructs the video control microcomputer 312 about the contents of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 about the reproduced sound. Then, processing such as lighting of the decoration lamp, motor drive control, and production time management is executed. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 are provided in the respective chips. Note that the RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are serially connected. Data transmission / reception is performed, and data transmission / reception is performed in parallel with the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 and between the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the VDP 313. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 313 includes an ultra-high speed VRAM (video RAM) 313a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 323, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 313b, a signal conversion circuit 313c for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 313 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the images of the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. . In addition, the VDP 313 notifies the video control microcomputer 312 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the video control microcomputer 312 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT is input. Further, the video control microcomputer 312 receives from the main control microcomputer 311 a synchronization signal SYNC that informs that the video control microcomputer 312 is operating normally and gives command transmission timing. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 in order to transmit and receive commands and data in the handshake method.

  Note that the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 uses a CPU that is faster or more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311. By providing a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 separately from the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and sharing the processing, it is possible to display a fast moving image on a large screen that is difficult to achieve with the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 alone. The display can be displayed on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801, and an increase in cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where two CPUs having processing capabilities equivalent to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 are used. be able to. Also, by providing two CPUs, it becomes possible to separately develop the control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, thereby shortening the development period of the new model. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as display control means for controlling display on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801. In addition, it can be said that the auxiliary display control means capable of displaying the auxiliary effect on the sub display device 801 is provided.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Fluctuation start command, start opening winning effect command, starting opening winning effect design command, customer waiting demonstration command, fanfare command, probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F 331 A variation stop command, a big hit end command, an error designation command, etc. are received as an effect control command signal. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Is provided.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs provided on the game board 30 (including the surrounding frame body 40). In addition, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device 18 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the front frame 12, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the surrounding frame body 40). A panel that drives and controls the device 44 (a drive motor 756 that drives the effect rotating body 753, a storage control solenoid 745a of the ball storage unit 740, a drive motor 814 of the rotation mechanism in the sub display unit 800, a drive motor 824 of the slide mechanism 820, etc.). An effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 and a frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling a frame effect device 45 (for example, a motor for operating the moving light 16) provided on the front frame 12 are provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps, motors and solenoids are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340. That is, the production control device 300 serves as an operation control unit capable of controlling the operation of the inflow restricting member (production rotator 753), and also includes a moving unit (slide mechanism 820) and a front / back reversing unit (rotation drive unit 810). And an operation control means for controlling the operation of the sub display device 801 by the state conversion means (rotation drive unit 810).

  Further, the effect control device 300 detects the on / off state of the switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12 and the various switches of the panel effect device 44, and detects the main control microcomputer (1st CPU). ) A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided. Note that various switches of the board effect device 44 include a storage ball sensor 746a of the storage ball effect device 730, a specific ball sensor 752, a sensor (not shown) for detecting the initial position of the rotation mechanism in the sub display unit 800, and a slide mechanism 820. A detection sensor 823 for detecting the initial position of the player, a passage detection sensor 774a of the winning ball effect device 770, and the like. In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12, and an amplifier circuit 337b that drives the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. It has been.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 made up of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and speaker, and a reference for these DC voltages It is configured to generate a voltage of NDC 24V used to turn on the power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312, DC 3. The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC 1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 includes a main control microcomputer 311, a video control microcomputer 312, a VDP 313, a sound source LSI 314, control circuits 332 to 335 for driving and controlling lamps and motors, speakers, and the like. Are supplied to the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, which are set in a reset state. In this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 312 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 313. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the video control microcomputer 312 and the VDP 313 can be improved.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification information is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time on the general-purpose display, processing for displaying a general-purpose variable display game to be stopped is performed. If the result of this normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general map display, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable members 37b and 37b of the normal variable prize winning device 37 for a predetermined time. The opening control is performed as described above (for example, for 0.3 seconds). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is made based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning opening 36 or the start opening 3 switch 644 in the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641. Based on this start-up memory, the jackpot determination random number value of the first special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether or not the first special figure variation display game is missed. Perform the process. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, for the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification information is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the main display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of the effect state (effect mode), sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, light emission of various LEDs, display on the sub display device 801 And the process which controls execution of the production | presentation relevant to the operation | movement, the storage ball production | presentation apparatus 730, and the winning ball production | presentation apparatus 770 is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. To perform the process. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, the movable member 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 by the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 or the large prize opening solenoid 39b by the big prize opening solenoid 38b. Is controlled to enable the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until one is made is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times or 2 times). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state (probability variation state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state (probability variation state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state (probability fluctuation state) based on the result aspect of which of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game And both the 2nd special figure fluctuation display games will be in a high probability state (probability fluctuation state).

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (ordinary high probability state) as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the normal variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short time operation state, and the normal variation winning device per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal map change display game (the normal map change time) to be the second change display time shorter than the first change display time (for example, 10,000 milliseconds is 600 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the general map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). Is 704 milliseconds). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 300 milliseconds is 800 milliseconds). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (number of times of opening of the general electric power) is not equal to the first number of times of opening for one time with respect to the result of one hit of the normal figure changing display game. It is possible to set the second number of times of opening a plurality of times (for example, 4 times). Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map variation display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) in the normal operation state (high normal probability) State).

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated. In the following description and drawings, the time reduction state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, a general power support state, or a power support state. It should be noted that the movable member 37b may be set not to be released in the normal low probability state (probability per normal figure is 0), or may be released for 5 seconds with a lower probability than the probability of releasing for 0.3 seconds. You may let them.

  Next, control of the gaming machine 10 will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 and timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 25 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 23, first, an interrupt prohibition process (step S1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs ( Step S2), a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs (Step S3), an interrupt mode setting process for setting an interrupt processing mode (Step S3) S4) is performed.

  Next, in order to wait for the program of the payout control device (payout board) 200 to start normally, for example, a time of 4 milliseconds is waited (step S5). As a result, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, and the payout control device 200 misses the command. Can be avoided. Next, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted, and OFF data for setting no output to all output ports is output (steps S6 and S7). Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is not used in this embodiment because it performs parallel communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) is set to a state in which it is not used. Processing is performed (step S8).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 is ON (step S9). If it is determined in step S9 that the initialization switch is OFF (step S9; No), it is checked whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (step S10). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S11). If it is determined in step S11 that the value of the power outage inspection area 1 is normal (step S11; Yes), it is checked whether the value of the power outage inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data 2 (Step S12), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S13).

  If it is determined in step S13 that the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S13; Yes), a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is calculated (step S14), and the calculated checksum and the power interruption are calculated. The current checksum is compared (step S15) to determine whether the checksums match (step S16). If it is determined in step S16 that the checksums match (step S16; Yes), the process proceeds to step S17 in FIG.

  Moreover, when it determines with the initialization switch being ON by step S9 (step S9; Yes), or when it determines with the value of a power failure inspection area | region not being normal at step S11 or step S13 (step S11; No or step S13; No) ) If it is determined in step S16 that the checksums do not match (step S16; No), the process proceeds to step S24 in FIG. 24 to perform initialization processing.

  In step S17 of FIG. 24, all the power outage inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared (step S18), and the area related to error and fraud monitoring is reset (step S19). Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20). If it is determined in step S20 that the state is not a high probability state (step S20; No), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20 that the state is a high probability state (step S20; Yes), ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S21), and the high probability provided in the collective display device 50, for example, is set. The ON data for turning on (lighting) the notification LED (probability state display section) is saved in the segment area (step S22). Next, a process (step S23) of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to a special figure game process number prepared for rationally executing a special figure game process described later to the effect control device 300 is performed (step S23). Proceed to S29.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S24, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S24), and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. (Step S25), the initial value upon power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (Step S26). Next, a time value for outputting the external information related to RWM clear is set (step S27), a command for turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.

  In step S29, the individual identification information is acquired from the individual ID register 111D, set in the serial communication circuit, and output from the information transmission unit 71. Next, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed (step S30). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S30, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S31). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Next, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) After saving the initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the normal hit in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S32), the interruption is permitted (step S33). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Next, initial value random number update processing (step S34) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, although not particularly limited, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using a random number (big hit random number) generated in a random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a soft random number generated by software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S34, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S35), and the power failure monitoring signal is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S36). If it is determined in step S36 that the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S36; No), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S34). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S34) (step S33), when a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step S34 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If it is determined in step S36 that the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S36; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S35. Determination is made (step S37). If it is determined in step S37 that it is not continued (step S37; No), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S36). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S37 that it is continuing (step S37; Yes), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S38), all output ports The process of outputting OFF data to (step S39).

  Next, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S40), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S41). Next, a process for calculating the checksum when the RWM is turned off (step S42), a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S43), and a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S44) are performed. After that, it waits for the power supply of the gaming machine 10 to be cut off. As described above, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power interruption is calculated, so that the information stored in the RWM before the power interruption of the gaming machine 10 due to the power failure is properly backed up. It can be determined whether or not the gaming machine 10 is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the CPU 111A, the timer interrupt process in FIG. 25 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first performs a register save process (step S51) for transferring a value held in a predetermined register to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register. Next, input from various sensors (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, start port 3 switch 644, usual gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, count switches 38a, 39a, etc.), that is, An input process (step S52) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Next, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S53) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large prize winning openings SOL38b, 39b, general electric power SOL37c) and the like is performed.

  Next, a command transmission process (step S54), a random number update process 1 (step S55), and a random number update process 2 (step S56) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the effect control device 300, the payout control device 200, and the like. )I do. Next, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 644, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches 38a and 39a. Or, a prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S57) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) is performed. Next, a special figure game process (step S58) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game, and a general figure game process (step S59) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S60) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display games and various information related to games to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor switch 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S61) for checking whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from, vibration fraud monitoring process (step S62) for checking whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor switch 62, External information editing processing (step S63) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Next, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S64), a process of restoring the register data saved in step S51 (step S65), and an interrupt permitting process (step S65) S66) is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S58) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 644 is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the special game process, the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first monitors the winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 644. A switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed. In this start port switch monitoring process, the first special figure 1 start winning port 36 and the second special figure 1 start winning port 641 that form the first start winning port, and the normal variation winning device 37 that forms the second start winning port are added to the game ball. When there is a winning, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted, and a game result pre-determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning.

  Next, the count switch monitoring process 1 (step A2) is performed. In the count switch monitoring process 1, a process of monitoring the count number of the count switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the count switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 is performed.

  Next, it is checked whether the special figure game processing timer has already expired or the special figure game process timer has been updated (-1) (step A3). It is determined whether the time is up (step A4). If it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has expired (step A4; Yes), a special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5) is performed, and a process (step A6) of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is performed using the table. Next, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step A7), the game branch process (step A8) is performed according to the special figure game process number.

  If the special figure game process number is “0” in step A8, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, the special figure fluctuation processing A special figure routine process (step A9) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed. Also, if the special figure game process number is “1” in step A8, the special figure is changing to set the stop display time of the special figure or to set the information necessary for performing the special figure display process. Processing (step A10) is performed.

  In addition, when the special figure game process number is “2” in step A8, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit or the big win for each big hit A special chart display process (step A11) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the mouth opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  In step A8, if the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step A12) to be performed is performed. If the special figure game process number is “4” in step A8, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step A8, if the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening, or a big hit end process The prize winning opening remaining ball process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed. If the special figure game process number is “6” in step A8, the big hit end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process (step A9) is performed.

  Next, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A16), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A17) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Next, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A19) related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A4 that the special figure game process timer has not expired (step A4; No), the process proceeds to step A16, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the start port switch monitoring process, the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first has a first start port (first special figure 1 start winning port 36, second special figure 1 start winning port). 641) is prepared (step A111), and a special chart start port switch common process (step A112) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric winning component (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 37 is activated and the game ball can be won (step). A113). If it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Yes), the process proceeds to step A116, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A113 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A113; No), it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is greater than or equal to the fraud occurrence determination number. (Step A114), it is determined whether or not the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (Step A115). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

  If it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; No), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) ( Step A116), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A117) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A115 that the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step A115; Yes), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start-port switch common processing (steps A112 and A117) in the above-described start-port switch monitoring processing will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 644.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the special figure start port switch common process, the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first monitors the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 644. It is checked whether or not there is an input to the target start port switch (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) (step A201), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A202). If it is determined in step A202 that there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A202; No), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A202 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A202; Yes), after saving the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch (step A203), The extracted big hit random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A204).

  Next, of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 644, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a) is stored in the gaming machine 10. The number of times output to the external management device (starting port signal output number) is loaded (step A205). Next, the start port signal output count is updated (+1) to check whether the output count overflows (step A206), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A207). If it is determined in step A207 that the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; No), the updated value is saved in the start signal output number area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A207 that the output count overflows (step A207; Yes), the process proceeds to step A209.

  Then, among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 644, the update target special figure holding corresponding to the monitored start port switch (for example, the start port 1 switch 36a etc.) is held (start memory). ) It is checked whether the number is less than the upper limit value (step A209), and it is determined whether the special figure reservation number is less than the upper limit value (step A210).

  If it is determined in step A210 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step A210; Yes), the number of special figure hold to be updated (for example, the number of special figure hold 1) is updated (+1). Processing (step A215) is performed. Next, among the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 644, a decoration special figure reservation number command (MODE) for a monitoring target starting port switch (for example, the starting port 1 switch 36a) is prepared. After that (step A216), a special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A217), and a command setting process (step A218) is performed. Next, the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the special figure hold number is calculated (step A219), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number saving area of the RWM (step A220).

  Next, the big hit symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A221), and saved in the big hit symbol random number saving area of the RWM (step A222). Next, the corresponding variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the save area of each random number of the RWM (steps A223, A224, A225), and the special figure hold information determination process (step A226) is performed to start the special figure The mouth switch common processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A210 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (step A210; No), the input of the start port switch according to step A202 is the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 3 switch 644. It is checked whether the input is input (step A211), and it is determined whether the input is the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 3 switch 644 (step A212). If it is determined in step A212 that the input is the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 3 switch 644 (step A212; Yes), a decorative special figure hold number command (hold overflow command) is prepared (step A213). Then, the command setting process (step A214) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A212 that the input of the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 3 switch 644 is not input (step A212; No), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 extracts a random number based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening (the first special figure 1 starting winning opening 36, the second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Thus, start memory means that can be stored as start memory for executing the variable display game is provided.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A226) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure hold information determination process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a winning of the starting port 2 (winning to the normal variable winning device 37) is made. (Step A231). If it is determined in step A231 that the start port 2 has been won (step A231; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is at a high probability (high probability state) (step A233). On the other hand, when it is determined in step A231 that the start port 2 is not won (step A231; No), it is determined whether or not the electric support (short time state) or big hit (special game state) is being performed (step A232). ).

  If it is determined in step A232 that the electric support or big hit is being made (step A232; Yes), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A232 that there is no power support or big hit (step A232; No), it is determined whether or not it is a high probability (high probability state) (step A233).

  If it is determined in step A233 that the probability is high (step A233; Yes), a determination value for high probability is set (step A234), and the target big hit random number is loaded (step A236). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A237). On the other hand, if it is determined in step A233 that it is not a high probability (step A233; No), a determination value for a low probability (normal probability state) is set (step A235), and the target big hit random number is loaded (step A235). Step A236). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a big hit based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A237).

  When it is determined in step A237 that it is a big hit (step A237; Yes), a big hit symbol information table (see FIG. 31) corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (step A238), and the target big hit symbol random number is set. Is loaded (step A239). Thereafter, symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired from the set jackpot symbol information table (step A240), a symbol information command corresponding to the acquired symbol information is prepared (step A242), and command setting processing is performed (step A240). Step A243). In the symbol information command, information on whether the special figure start memory is generated by winning one of the first special figure 1 start winning opening 36, the second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641, and the normal variable winning apparatus 37 is included. included. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A237 that the game is not a big hit (step A237; No), the symbol information is obtained (step A241), and the symbol information command corresponding to the acquired symbol information is prepared (step A242). Then, command setting processing is performed (step A243).

  Next, the target variation pattern random number 1 is loaded (step A244), a variation pattern random number command corresponding to the target variation pattern random number 1 is prepared (step A245), command setting processing is performed (step A246), The hold information determination process ends. By this processing, a special figure holding number command is transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the occurrence of the start memory, and then the special figure type / symbol information command and the variation pattern random number are given as pre-determined information (pre-determined command). Command is sent. Then, the production control device 300 increases the special figure start memory number based on the decoration special figure reservation number command, and performs a pre-production (prefetching production) based on the symbol information command and the variation pattern random number command.

  That is, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 can alert | report a result relevant information to a player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game, such as changing the holding | maintenance display 47 displayed on the main display apparatus 41. It becomes. Therefore, the game control device 100 can be pre-determined that can pre-determine the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Eggplant.

  Here, for jackpot random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers that need to improve confidentiality (influence the results), the result information after determination is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as symbol information commands. On the other hand, for the variation pattern random number that does not need to improve confidentiality (does not affect the result), the variation control random number command is used as the variation pattern random number command as it is or converted into information indicating the random number value. To send to. Note that the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system (variation group) of the second half fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a random number for performing detailed distribution from the reach system. Pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation. Since it is sufficient that even the reach system can be transmitted to the production control device 300 side at the time of prior determination, information regarding the fluctuation pattern random number 1 may be transmitted.

  Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of start winning when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good. Further, the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern random number 3 may be included in the variation pattern random number command, or a command indicating the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 may be transmitted instead of the variation pattern random number command. Anyway. That is, all the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 may be transmitted to the effect control device 300, or the variation pattern number may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 after the variation pattern is determined as at the start of the variation. good.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure normal processing, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first checks whether the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (step A301). ), It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step A302). If it is determined in step A302 that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A302; Yes), it is checked whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (step A303). ), It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step A304). If it is determined in step A304 that the number of special figure 1 hold is 0 (step A304; Yes), it is checked whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step A305), and the customer waiting demo has already started. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A306).

  If it is determined in step A306 that the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A306; No), a customer waiting demo flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A307). Then, the customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A308), the command setting process (step A309), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A310) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A306 that the customer waiting demo has been started (step A306; Yes), the customer waiting demo flag is already saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A307), and the customer waiting demo command is displayed. Is also prepared (step A308) and the command setting process (step A309) is also executed, so the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A310) is performed without performing these processes, and the special figure normal process is terminated. To do. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, a process number “0” relating to the special figure normal process, a flag (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) for defining a special prize opening fraud monitoring period, and the like are set.

  Further, when it is determined in step A302 that the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step A302; No), or when it is determined in step A304 that the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A304; No), the special figure 2 hold number is not zero. A jackpot flag setting process (step A311) is performed for setting shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag for determining whether or not the figure variation display game is a jackpot.

  Next, a special symbol stop symbol setting process (step A312) which is a process related to the setting of a special symbol stop symbol (symbol information), specifically, a special symbol stop symbol determination process based on the presence / absence of a big hit flag and a symbol random number. ), The signal corresponding to the special figure stop symbol number of the special figure stop symbol that has been set is saved in the test signal output data area (step A313), and the symbol information is saved as the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2). ) Is saved in the symbol information (work) area corresponding to ().

  Next, the special figure fluctuation flag corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (step A315), and a table for setting information regarding the fluctuation pattern is prepared (step A316). Next, a variation pattern setting process (step A317) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game and a variation start information setting process (step A318) for setting variation start information are performed. In this variation start information setting process, a variation pattern command including information related to a variation pattern of a special map variation display game, a decorative special command command corresponding to stop symbol pattern (stop result mode) information related to the decorative special diagram variation display game, main A decoration special figure hold number command (decoration special figure hold number command) related to the hold display 47 displayed on the display device 41 is prepared. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

  Subsequently, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A319) is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated. In the special figure changing process transition setting process, the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, the information relating to the end of the customer waiting demonstration, the test signal relating to the change of the first special figure, or the second special figure Test signal during fluctuation, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 (for example, flag relating to fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51, blinking of the special figure 1 display 51 For the control of the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52 (for example, a flag relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 display) The initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of 52) is set.

  In this way, when the special figure 2 hold number in step A301 and step A302 is checked before the special figure 1 hold number check in steps A303 and A304, the special figure 2 hold number is not zero. Is executed from the big hit flag setting process (step A311) based on the second start memory to the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A319), the special figure 2 hold number is 0 and the special figure 1 hold number is not 0. In this case, the special chart changing process transition setting process (step A319) is executed from the big hit flag setting process (step A311) based on the first start memory. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game.

  FIG. 31 shows a jackpot symbol information table for determining the type of special result when the result is a special result (big hit). FIG. 31A is a jackpot symbol information table corresponding to the first special symbol variation display game, and FIG. 31B is a jackpot symbol information table corresponding to the second special symbol variation display game.

  In the special result, a plurality of types having different game values such as an execution mode of the special game state and an additional game value given to the player after the end of the special game state are set. A special result is selected based on the jackpot symbol random number extracted based on the winning of the game ball. That is, it can be said that the execution state of the special game state and the amount of additional game value are determined based on the jackpot symbol random number. The execution mode of the special game state in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the number of rounds that can be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening (that is, the number of game balls (prize balls) that can be acquired in the special game state), The type of the big winning opening to be opened (upper AT (second special variable winning device 39), lower AT (first special variable winning device 38)). Further, the additional game value means that the game state is set to a high probability state until the next special result mode is derived after the special game state ends, or a special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state ends. It is to be in a short time state. Further, based on the jackpot symbol random number, it is also determined whether the probability state is notified (probability is clear) or not notified (probability is ambiguous) after the end of the special gaming state.

  When the jackpot symbol random number is 1 to 20, the opening of the upper AT (second special variable winning device 39) is selected. In this case, the opening is performed three times with a predetermined closing time in one round (R). For example, when three rounds are executed, the opening is performed nine times. As will be described later, in the special figure variation display game that has a special result in which the upper AT (second special variation prize winning device 39) is released, an auxiliary game that suggests the number of times of opening is performed. However, in the auxiliary game, the number of times of opening may be suggested that is less than the actual number of times of opening.

  Of these jackpots, the probability variation 3R jackpot, the probability variation 12R jackpot, the probability variation 6R jackpot, and the probability variation 9R jackpot have the same results as the decoration special figure variation display game. These can be discriminated only by the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and it is difficult to identify which jackpot. Thereby, in the special game state, the player is expected to have the number of times of opening more than the number of times of opening suggested in the auxiliary game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  Also, when the jackpot symbol random number is 31 to 35 (probability 2R jackpot) and when the jackpot symbol random number is 46 to 50 (usually 2R jackpot), the probability that the probability state is not clearly notified after the end of the special gaming state It becomes ambiguous. In these jackpots, the result mode of the special display map variation display game is common, and the execution mode of the special game state is also the same. These can be discriminated only by the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and it is difficult to identify which jackpot. Thus, the player is expected to be in a high probability state in the probability ambiguous state, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, the distribution of special results is such that the probability that a special result advantageous to the player is selected in the second special figure variation display game is higher than that in the first special figure variation display game.

  That is, the special result mode includes a first special result mode and a second special result mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first special result mode, and the first special result mode and the second special result mode. With the result mode, a combination mode of a plurality of pieces of identification information in the decoration special figure variation display game is common. The advantage to the player is that there are a large number of game balls (prize balls) that can be acquired in the special game state, and that it is easy to enter the start prize area after the special game state ends (so-called short-time state occurs) And the probability that a special result is derived in the variable display game after the special gaming state ends (a so-called probability variation state occurs).

  Among the above-mentioned special result modes, for the probability variation 2R jackpot and the normal 2R jackpot, the result mode of the normal 2R jackpot constitutes the first special result mode, and the special result is derived in the variable display game after the end of the special gaming state. The result mode of the probability variation 2R jackpot in which a probability variation state with a high probability occurs forms a second special result mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first special result mode.

  In addition, for the probability variation 3R jackpot and the probability variation 12R jackpot, the result mode of the probability variation 3R jackpot constitutes the first special result mode, and the result mode of the probability variation 12R jackpot having a large number of times of opening in the special gaming state is the first special result mode. The second special result mode is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, for the probability variation 6R jackpot and the probability variation 9R jackpot, the result mode of the probability variation 6R jackpot constitutes the first special result mode, and the result mode of the probability variation 9R jackpot having a large number of times of opening in the special gaming state is the first special result mode. The second special result mode is advantageous to the player.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A317) in the above-described special figure routine process will be described. As shown in FIG. 32, in the variation pattern setting process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first checks whether the symbol information (for work) is off symbol information (step A321), and the off symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is information (step A322).

  If it is determined in step A322 that the symbol information is out of place (step A322; Yes), a variation group selection table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) corresponding to the current gaming state is prepared (step A323). The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A325). On the other hand, when it is determined in step A322 that the symbol information is not out of step (step A322; No), the big hit time fluctuation group selection table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is displayed. Prepare (step A324), and load and prepare the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the target area (step A325).

  Next, a 2-byte distribution process (step A326) is performed, and the address of the reach system obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A327). Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area and prepared (step A328), and a sorting process (step A329) is performed to obtain the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the sorting (step A330). Next, the latter-half variation number is saved in the target latter-half variation number area (step A331), and it is checked whether the latter-half variation number is a number for non-reach variation (step A332). Determine (step A333).

  When it is determined in step A333 that the number is a variation without reach (step A333; Yes), the first half variation selection table 1 (for no reach) is prepared (step A334), and the variation pattern random number 3 is obtained from the target region. Is prepared by loading (step A336). On the other hand, if it is determined in step A333 that the number is not a reachless variation number (step A333; No), the first half variation selection table 2 (for reach) is prepared (step A335), and the variation pattern random number 3 from the target region. Is prepared by loading (step A336).

  Next, a sorting process is performed (step A337), and the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step A338), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. Through the above processing, a variation group (no reach, normal reach, or SP1 to 4 reach) is selected based on the variation pattern random number 1, and a detailed production distribution (variation pattern) is selected from the variation group based on the variation pattern random number 2. And the variation mode of the first half variation until reaching the reach state is selected based on the variation pattern random number 3.

  In the variation group selection table at the time of big hit shown in FIG. 33, only the variation group that reaches the reach state can be selected. Also, SP4 reach can be selected only in the case of the second special figure variation display game. 34 and 35, the fluctuation group selection table at the time of loss of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the fluctuation group selection table at the time of deviation of the second special figure fluctuation display game are in the short-time state (normal power support state). The table to be used differs depending on whether or not it is in the short-time state (general power support state, low support) (when the normal figure low probability state), the table of FIG. In the case of the probability state, the table of FIG. 35 is used for “high support”.

  In the variation group selection table at the time of losing of the first special figure variation display game in the case of not being in the short time state shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the table to be used differs depending on the first start memory number. If it is not in the short-time state, when the first start memory number is 1, that is, when the first start memory number is changed from 1 to 0 by the start of the first special figure variable display game, the special figure variable display game is displayed. The table of FIG. 34 (b) is used when the table of FIG. 34 (a) is used and the first start memory number is 2, 3 or 4. The larger the first start memory number, the shorter the reach time and the normal reach variation time, so that the first start memory can be quickly digested.

  Similarly, in the variation group selection table at the time of the loss of the second special figure variation display game in the case where the time reduction state is not shown in FIGS. . If it is not in the short-time state, when the second start memory number is 1, that is, when the second start memory number becomes 1 to 0 by the start of the second special figure variable display game, The table of FIG. 34 (d) is used when the table of FIG. 34 (c) is used and the second start memory number is 2, 3 or 4. The larger the second start memory number, the shorter the reach time of no reach and normal reach, so that the second start memory can be quickly digested.

  In the variation group selection table when the first special figure variation display game is lost in the short time state shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B, when the first start memory number is 1, that is, When the first start memory number is changed from 1 to 0 by the start of one special figure variable display game, the first start memory number is 2, 3 or 4 using the table of FIG. 35A for the special figure variable display game. At that time, the table of FIG. 35B is used. Also in this case, when the number of first start memories is large, there is no reach and the fluctuation time of normal reach is shortened, so that the first start memories can be quickly digested. In addition, the fluctuation time without reach when the first start memory number is 1 is longer than the fluctuation time without reach when not in the short-time state, and the special time fluctuation in the short-time state which is advantageous to the player over the normal gaming state The display game is prevented from being interrupted.

  Further, in the variation group selection table at the time of losing of the second special figure variation display game in the time-short state shown in FIGS. 35 (c) and (d), when the second start memory number is 1, that is, When the second start memory number changes from 1 to 0 due to the start of the 2 special figure variation display game, the second start memory number is 2, 3 or 4 using the table of FIG. At that time, the table of FIG. 35 (d) is used. Also in this case, when the number of second start memories is large, there is no reach and the fluctuation time of normal reach is shortened, so that the second start memories can be quickly digested.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (step A318) in the above-described special figure routine process will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the change start information setting process, the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 first clears the random number save areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step A401). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A402), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A403). Next, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A404), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A405).

  Next, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A406), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A407). Next, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is calculated and prepared (step A408), and the second half variation number is prepared as a variation command (ACTION) (step A409), and command setting processing is performed (step A409). Step A410).

  Next, a symbol information command is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area (step A411), and command setting processing is performed (step A412). Next, a decoration special figure holding number command (MODE) corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A413), the address of the random number saving area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A414), and the variation symbol discrimination is performed. The special figure hold count corresponding to the flag is updated by -1 (step A415). Next, a decoration special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step A416), and command setting processing is performed (step A417). Next, the random number saving area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is shifted (step A418), the shifted empty area is cleared to 0 (step A419), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure fluctuation display game including information relating to the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set, and the special figure fluctuation display game is executed based on this information. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation display game execution means capable of executing a variation display game according to any of a plurality of variation patterns, and the special figure variation display game has a plurality of variation patterns having different execution times. It is executed by either. Further, this information will be transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. At the time of prior determination, the value of the variation pattern random number 1 is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as it is. Number) is transmitted to the production control device 300.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. As described above, the effect control device 300 includes the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 and the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 that performs video control under the control of the main control microcomputer 311. The control process by the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 mainly includes a 1st main process shown in FIG. 37 and an interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 2 milliseconds).

[1st main processing]
First, the 1st main process will be described. In this 1st main process, as shown in FIG. 37, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step B1), and various initialization processes for initializing the CPU, setting the initial value of the RAM, initializing random numbers, etc. are performed (step B2). Then, various interrupt timers are started (step B3), and interrupts are permitted (step B4).

  In this 1st main process, a loop process is then performed as the main loop process. In this loop process, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step B5), and an effect button input process (step B6) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. . Next, a game control command analysis process (step B7) is performed. In this game control command analysis process, it is determined whether or not a command related to a game transmitted from the game control device 100 has been correctly received. If the command has been correctly received, the command is determined and a scene control process to be described later is performed. Process to classify commands for

  Next, a test mode process (step B8) which is a process related to a test mode for testing the main display device 41, the sub display device 801, the decoration device, the rendering device, and the like is performed. When the test mode is set to the test mode, the subsequent game processing is not performed. However, in the test mode, when the display on the main display device 41 or the sub display device 801, the output of sound from the speaker, the light emission of the LED of the decoration device, the operation of the effect device, or the like is performed, a process for controlling these ( Control is performed in steps B11 to B13) described later. Note that the test mode ends when the gaming machine 10 is powered off.

  Next, a first scene control process (step B9) relating to the control of the game effect is performed, and an effect command editing process (step B10) for editing a command output to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 is performed. Next, a sound control process (step B11) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process (step B12) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. ), Motor / SOL control processing (step B13) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 is performed. Next, a random number update process (step B14) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step B5).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing will be described. In this interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 38, first, a timer update process (step B21) for updating a soft timer managed by a program is performed. Next, an input process (step B22) for processing a signal input to the effect control device 300 and an output process (step B23) for processing a signal output from the effect control device 300 are performed. Next, a main command reception process (step B24) for receiving a command related to a game transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 is performed, and the interrupt process is terminated.

[2nd main processing]
The video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 312 of the effect control device 300 performs 2nd main processing shown in FIG. In the 2nd main process, as shown in FIG. 39, the process at the start of the program is first performed. As a process at the time of starting the program, first, a CPU initialization process for initializing the CPU (step C1) is performed, the RAM is cleared to 0 (step C2), and an initial value of the RAM is set (step C3). Next, VDP initialization processing (step C4) for initializing the VDP 313 is performed, and various interrupts are permitted (step C5). Next, initialization processing of various control processes (step C6) is performed, and screen drawing is permitted (step C7).

  In the 2nd main process, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, the system cycle wait flag is cleared (step C8), and it is determined whether or not the system cycle wait flag is 1 (step C9). The system cycle is a cycle for switching between two buffers for temporarily storing image data. When the switching is enabled, the system cycle flag is “1”. Until the system cycle wait flag becomes 1, the determination whether the system cycle wait flag is 1 is repeated (step C9). When the system cycle wait flag becomes 1 (step C9; Yes), WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C10).

  Next, a received command check process (step C11) is performed. In this received command check process, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 has been correctly received. If the command has been correctly received, the command is determined and the 2nd scene control process is performed. Process to classify commands for Next, a 2nd scene control process (step C12) for determining display contents is performed based on the received command. In the 2nd scene control process, a notice character or the like or a display priority order is set, and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the main display device 41 or the sub display device 801.

  Next, background processing (step C13) for setting the background is performed. In this background process, a process of displaying a background according to the gaming state (whether there is a probability state or a waiting state for customers), the gaming mode, the production mode, the reach scene, and the like is performed. Next, a variable display process (step C14), which is a display control process related to the variation of the identification information in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, is performed, and the main display is interlocked with the display of the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display. A hold display process (step C15) for setting the hold display 47 displayed on the device 41 is performed. In the hold display processing, processing related to display of a pre-effect (pre-read effect) that changes the display mode of the hold display 47 is also performed based on the pre-effect information stored in the start storage area.

  Next, a customer waiting demo process (step C16) related to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed. In this customer waiting demonstration process, processing relating to setting of a customer waiting screen for displaying characters, videos, etc., processing relating to setting of notification display to be displayed on the customer waiting screen, and the like are performed. Subsequently, the ROM data is transferred to the buffer set in the RAM, the display system process (step C17) for performing the actual display process is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing the system cycle wait flag (step C8).

[1st scene control processing]
Next, details of the 1st scene control process (step B9) in the 1st main process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the 1st scene control process, the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the test mode (step B31). If it is determined in step B31 that the test mode is being executed (step B31; Yes), the 1st scene control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B31 that the test mode is not in effect (step B31; No), it is determined whether a scene change command has been received (step B32). This scene change command includes various commands relating to games transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (power-on command, power failure recovery command, customer waiting demo command, variation pattern command, symbol stop command, jackpot fanfare command, N-th open command, interval command, etc.).

  If it is determined in step B32 that a scene change command has been received (step B32; Yes), the game state to be updated (current game state) is acquired (step B33), and the current scene change command received is received. It is determined whether or not the game state is valid, that is, whether or not the command is valid (step B34). If it is determined in step B34 that the command is valid (step B34; Yes), the received command is saved (step B35), an effect request flag is set (step B36), and the command identifier of the received command Branch processing (step B37) is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B32 that the scene change command has not been received (step B32; No), or if it is determined that the command is not valid in step B34 (step B34; No), the command of the received command Branch processing based on the identifier (step B37) is performed. In this case, a branch is performed based on the identifier of the command that was most recently valid.

  In the branch process based on the command identifier (step B37), a process to be executed is selected based on the received command. When a power-on command is received, a power-on process (step B38) for performing a process necessary when the power is turned on is performed. When a power failure recovery command is received, a power failure recovery (other than waiting for a customer) process (step B39) for performing processing necessary at the time of power failure recovery is performed. When a customer waiting demo command is received, a customer waiting process (step B40) for performing processing related to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed.

  When a variation pattern command is received, a variation processing (step B41) for performing processing relating to the execution of the decoration special diagram variation display game is performed. In the changing process, information necessary to play the decorative special figure changing display game is set. In the setting of information necessary for playing this decoration special figure variation display game, for example, production based on information included in the variation pattern command transmitted from the game control device 100 (whether it is a big hit, variation pattern information, etc.) (Variation pattern, variation time, etc.) are set.

  When a symbol stop command is received, a symbol stop process (step B42), which is a process of stopping the variation display of the identification information in the decorative special symbol variation display game and displaying the result mode, is performed. In the symbol stop process, the stop display time of the result in the decorative special symbol variation display game is set. If a fanfare command is received, a big hit fanfare process (step B43), which is a process related to the start of the special game state, is performed. In addition, when the big-open-release n-th command is received, a big hit round process (step B44), which is a process related to the round game, is performed. When an interval command is received, a big hit interval process (step B45), which is a process related to the interval between rounds, is performed. When an ending command is received, a big hit ending process (step B46), which is a process related to the end of the special gaming state, is performed.

  After performing each of the above-described processes selected by the branch process based on the command identifier (step B37), a process based on a command that is not immediately reflected in the video is performed. As this process, first, a hold number command reception process (step B47) is performed to perform processing based on a hold number command (special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command) including information on increase / decrease of startup memory. A decoration special figure command reception process (step B48) is performed for performing a process based on a special decoration figure command including information related to the stop symbol of the figure variation display game.

  Next, based on a pre-determination command (symbol information command, variation pattern random number command) including a result of a pre-reading process for predetermining the result of the special symbol variation display game based on the start-up memory before the execution of the special symbol variation display game Pre-determination command reception processing (step B49) for performing processing is performed. Next, a probability information command reception process (step B50) is performed in which a corresponding value is internally set and a background command is transmitted to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 312 based on a probability information command including information on the probability state. Then, the 1st scene control process ends.

[Waiting for customers]
Next, details of the customer waiting process (step B40) in the first scene control process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the customer waiting process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first enters a customer waiting state and sets a customer waiting start flag that is set until the customer waiting screen is displayed. It is determined whether or not there is (step B101). If it is determined in step B101 that there is a customer waiting start flag (step B101; Yes), whether or not an effect mode (game mode) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like is being selected, specifically, For example, it is determined whether or not an effect mode selection screen is displayed on the main display device 41 or the like (step B105). On the other hand, if it is determined in step B101 that there is no customer waiting start flag (step B101; No), whether or not a customer waiting demo command transmitted from the game control device 100 when the customer waiting state is entered is received. Is determined (step B102).

  If it is determined in step B102 that the customer waiting demo command has not been received (step B102; No), the customer waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B102 that a customer waiting demo command has been received (step B102; Yes), a customer waiting start timer is set (step B103), and a customer waiting start flag is set (step B104). It is determined whether or not an effect mode (game mode) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is being selected, specifically, for example, whether or not an effect mode selection screen is displayed on the main display device 41 or the like. (Step B105).

  If it is determined in step B105 that the effect mode (game mode) is being selected (step B105; Yes), the player selects the effect mode (game mode) by operating the selection button (not shown) or the like by the player. It is determined whether or not there has been a mode selection operation (step B107). On the other hand, if it is determined in step B105 that the effect mode (game mode) is not selected (step B105; No), an instruction is given to switch the effect mode (game mode) by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like. Whether or not there has been a mode switching operation (long press operation for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 5 seconds)), specifically, for example, whether or not there has been an operation to instruct the main display device 41 or the like to display an effect mode selection screen Is determined (step B106).

  When it is determined in step B106 that there has been a mode switching operation (step B106; Yes), for example, an effect mode selection screen is displayed on the main display device 41 or the like, and then an effect is generated by an operation of a selection button or the like by the player. It is determined whether or not there has been a mode selection operation for selecting a mode (game mode) (step B107). If it is determined in step B107 that there has been no mode selection operation (step B107; No), whether or not there has been a mode determination operation for determining the effect mode (game mode) by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like. Is determined (step B109). On the other hand, if it is determined in step B107 that there has been a mode selection operation (step B107; Yes), an effect mode (game mode) corresponding to the mode selection operation is displayed on the main display device 41 or the like (step B108). ), It is determined whether or not there has been a mode confirmation operation for confirming the effect mode (game mode) by the player operating the effect button 25 or the like (step B109).

  If it is determined in step B109 that there has been a mode determination operation (step B109; Yes), an effect mode (game mode) corresponding to the mode determination operation is set (step B110), and the customer waiting start timer is set to the time. It is checked whether it has been uploaded (step B111). If it is determined in step B106 that there is no mode switching operation (step B106; No), or if it is determined in step B109 that there is no mode confirmation operation (step B109; No), the customer waiting start timer is timed up. It is checked whether it has been done (step B111).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting start timer has expired (step B112). If it is determined that the customer waiting start timer has not expired (step B112; No), the customer waiting process is terminated. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer waiting start timer has expired (step B112; Yes), a customer waiting demo setting process for setting the type, layout, etc. of the notification display information displayed on the customer waiting screen is performed (step B113). ) The customer waiting start flag is reset (step B114), and the customer waiting process is terminated.

  When the set effect mode (game mode) is switched from the second effect mode (second game mode) to the first effect mode (first game mode), it is displayed on the main display device 41. The background image is switched to the first mode background image (Imperial mode background image), and the symbol displayed on the main display device 41 is switched to the first mode symbol (Imperial symbol). When the set effect mode (game mode) is switched from the first effect mode (first game mode) to the second effect mode (second game mode), it is displayed on the main display device 41. The background image is switched to the second mode background image (the alliance mode background image), and the symbol displayed on the main display device 41 is switched to the second mode symbol (the alliance symbol).

  That is, the effect control device 300 changes the game mode (effect mode) to the first game mode (first effect mode) or the second based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in this embodiment, the mode selection operation and the mode confirmation operation). Game mode setting means capable of setting the game mode (second effect mode) and game effect means capable of performing a game effect corresponding to the game mode (effect mode) set by the game mode setting means Eggplant. Further, the effect button 25 and the selection button (not shown) constitute a mode selection operation unit that can accept an operation for selecting a game mode (effect mode), and the game mode setting means (the effect control device 300) has a mode. The game mode (effect mode) is set to the first game mode (first effect mode) or the second game mode (second effect mode) based on the operation input of the selection operation unit (effect button 25, selection button). Has been.

  If a start winning ball is detected before the mode confirmation operation for confirming the effect mode (game mode) is executed, the effect mode (game mode) selected at that time is set. It is also possible to take over the previous setting (the setting before the mode switching operation) as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, the mode change is configured to end while waiting for a customer. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation of the effect button 25 or the like by a player while waiting for a customer ( It is also possible to configure a production mode (game mode) according to the mode determination operation) and then start production corresponding to the set production mode (game mode) when the change starts. .

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode (game mode) switching process (steps B105 to B110) is performed in the customer waiting process, that is, the effect mode (game mode) is switched while in the customer waiting state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to configure the effect mode to be switched during the execution of the variable display game. In that case, the variation effect pattern (described later) may be switched during the variation display game that was executed when the effect mode was switched, or after the variation display game that was executed when the effect mode was switched. It may be switched at the start of the variable display game. However, the effect mode is not switched when the change effect pattern is switched during the reach described later.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode (game mode) is switched according to the player's operation of the effect button 25 or the like (mode confirmation operation). However, the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, according to the probability state It is also possible to configure to switch the effect mode (game mode). That is, for example, it is possible to switch the effect mode (game mode) according to the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game, or the probability state of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is also possible to configure so that the effect mode (game mode) is switched according to (ordinary low probability state or ordinary high probability state).

[Fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the changing process (step B41) in the first scene control process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the changing process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there is an effect request flag (step B201). The effect request flag is a flag that is set when a valid command is received. When there is this flag, processing based on the received command is performed.

  If it is determined in step B201 that there is an effect request flag (step B201; Yes), PB information that is information related to the input of the effect button 25 is cleared (step B202), and the movable body request set process (step B203). I do. Next, the second effect mode selection table (see FIG. 49) is set (step B204), and it is determined whether or not the first effect mode (first game mode) is set (step B205).

  When it is determined in step B205 that the first effect mode (first game mode) is not set (step B205; No), that is, when the second effect mode (second game mode) is set. The variation effect pattern setting for setting the details of the variation effect pattern based on the variation start command (the symbol information command and the variation pattern command) from the game control device 100 with reference to the set second effect mode selection table. Processing (step B207) is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B205 that the first effect mode (first game mode) is set (step B205; Yes), the second effect mode selection table set in step B204 is used. A first effect mode selection table (see FIG. 49) is set (step B206). And the variation production pattern which sets the detail of a variation production pattern based on the variation start command (a symbol information command and a variation pattern command) from the game control device 100 with reference to the set selection table for the first production mode A setting process (step B207) is performed.

  Next, an accessory action pattern setting process (step B208) and a random number seed initialization process (step B209) such as the sub display device 801 are performed to set a scene sequence table corresponding to the set variation pattern (step B210). . The scene sequence table is a table for managing the execution timing and time of various displays such as the start and stop of variable display and the display of effect characters in the decoration special figure variable display game, and the operation of the sub display device 801. In the scene sequence table, the execution order of a plurality of scenes in which execution contents and time are defined is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed by sequentially executing the scenes according to the scene sequence table.

  Next, a variation time setting process (step B211) for setting the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed, and the first scene and the scene update timer are set (step B212). Then, the effect request flag is cleared (step B213), and the changing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step B201 that there is no effect request flag (step B201; No), a pseudo-continuous chance control process (step B214) related to the effect control by the stored ball effect device 730 is performed. Thereafter, a variable effect switching process related to the switching of effects during reach is performed (step B215), and an auxiliary game control process (step B216) for indicating the number of times the second special variable winning device 39 is released is performed. It is determined whether or not the value is 0 (step B217). The scene update timer measures the execution time of the scene managed according to the scene sequence table, and the value of this scene update timer being 0 indicates that the scene being executed has ended.

  When it is determined in step B217 that the value of the scene update timer is not 0 (step B217; No), the accessory action control process (step B219) for controlling the action of the accessory is performed, and the changing process ends. . On the other hand, when it is determined in step B217 that the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step B217; Yes), the next normal scene data is set (step B218). As a result, a new scene is started and a predetermined value corresponding to the scene is set in the scene update timer. Then, an accessory operation control process (step B219) for controlling the operation of an accessory such as the sub-display device 801 is performed, and the changing process ends.

[Pseudo consecutive chance control processing]
FIG. 43 shows the pseudo-continuous chance control process (step B214) in the changing process. In this pseudo-continuous chance control process, after a temporary stop in a result mode other than the special result mode in the decoration special map variable display game in the middle of the special map variable display game and the rolling mode of the game ball in the storage ball effect device 730, again. Control of pseudo continuous chance effect in association with pseudo continuous variation in which re-variable display for starting the variable display is performed once or more is performed. In this pseudo-continuous chance effect, a re-variable display is performed based on the game ball rolling on the stored ball effect device 730 flowing into the specific inflow port 767a.

  In the pseudo continuous chance control process, first, it is determined whether or not a pseudo continuous chance effect is being performed (step B221). When the pseudo-continuous chance effect is being performed (step B221; Yes), it is determined whether it is during the ball release chance period during which the game balls stored in the storage channel 742 of the ball storage unit 740 can be discharged (step B224). . Further, when the pseudo continuous chance effect is not being performed (step B221; No), it is checked whether or not the execution condition of the pseudo continuous chance effect is satisfied (step B222).

  The execution condition of the pseudo-continuous chance effect is a variation effect pattern in which a game ball is stored in the storage channel 742 of the ball storage unit 740 and the pseudo-continuous chance effect can be executed (at least pseudo-continuous change can be executed). A specific variation effect pattern) is selected. Whether or not the game ball is stored is determined based on a detection signal from the stored ball sensor 746a. When the execution condition of the pseudo continuous chance effect is not satisfied (step B223; No), the pseudo continuous chance control process is terminated. Further, when the execution condition of the pseudo-continuous chance effect is satisfied (step B223; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the ball release chance period (step B224). Thus, by not selecting the execution of the pseudo-chance chance effect when there is no stored ball, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the ball effect is performed in a state where the game ball is not stored and the game ball is not released. In addition, by performing the ball effect at the time of executing the specific variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the special figure variation display game from ending without waiting for the end of the ball effect.

  If it is during the ball release chance period (step B224; Yes), it is determined whether there is an operation of the effect button (step B227). If it is not during the ball discharge chance period (step B224; No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ball discharge chance period (step B225). Then, when it is not the start timing of the ball release chance period (step B225; No), the pseudo continuous chance control process ends. If it is the start timing of the ball release chance period (step B225; Yes), the ball release chance period is started by subtracting 1 from the number of pseudo consecutive times (step B226), and it is determined whether there is an operation of the effect button ( Step B227).

  The maximum number of pseudo-continuous displays (1 to 4 times), which is the maximum number of re-variable displays that can be executed in the selected variation effect pattern, is set as an initial value, and the number of pseudo-continuous times is set every time the ball discharge chance period starts. By subtracting one, the remaining executable number of re-variable display is managed. In other words, the production control device 300 serves as an execution number determination means capable of determining the number of executions of the ball effect that can be executed in the variable display game according to the type of the variable display pattern of the variable display game.

  When the production button is operated (step B227; Yes), one storage ball discharge operation by driving the storage control solenoid 745a is set (step B228), and it is determined whether the sphere is detected by the specific sphere sensor. (Step B229). If there is no operation of the effect button (step B227; No), it is determined whether a specific sphere sensor 752 has detected a sphere (step B229).

  When a sphere is not detected by the specific sphere sensor 752 (step B229; No), that is, when the inflow to the specific inflow port 767a is not detected, it is determined whether the sphere release chance period has elapsed (step B230). ). When the ball release chance period has not elapsed (step B230; No), the pseudo continuous chance control process is terminated. If the ball release chance period has elapsed (step B230; Yes), it is determined whether the number of pseudo consecutive times is 0 (step B231).

  If the number of pseudo-continuous times is 0 (step B231; Yes), that is, if the next re-variation display is not scheduled in the special figure variation display game being executed, the end of the pseudo-continuous chance effect is set (step B235). ), The pseudo continuous chance control process is terminated. If the number of simulated consecutive times is not 0 (step B231; No), a variable region increase (screen division) effect corresponding to the remaining number of simulated consecutive times is set (step B232), and the simulated continuous chance control process is terminated. In this case, the next re-variation display is scheduled in the special figure variation display game being executed, and instead of the scheduled re-variation display execution, a variable region increase effect is performed. In this variable area increase effect, the display area of the main display device 41 is divided according to the number of scheduled re-variable displays, and the decorative special figure variable display game is displayed independently in each area.

  On the other hand, when the sphere is detected by the specific sphere sensor 752 (step B229; Yes), that is, when an inflow to the specific inflow port 767a is detected, it is determined whether the number of pseudo consecutive times is 0 (step B233). ). If the number of simulated consecutive times is not 0 (step B233; No), the next ball release chance effect is set (step B235), and the simulated continuous chance effect is terminated. Further, when the number of times of pseudo-continuous is 0 (step B233; Yes), the end of the pseudo-continuous chance effect is set (step B234), and the pseudo-continuous chance effect is ended.

  In other words, the production control device 300 releases the game ball from the ball storage unit (storage channel 742) based on the operation unit (production button 25) being operated during the execution of the variable display game, thereby providing the ball production. In addition to providing a ball effect execution means that can be executed, it is possible to change the effect mode of the running variation display game depending on whether or not a game ball has flowed into a specific area (specific inlet 767a) in the ball effect. The production mode change means. In addition, the effect control device 300 forms part of a storage determination unit that can determine whether or not a game ball is stored in the ball storage unit (storage channel 742), and a ball effect execution unit (effect). The control device 300) constitutes a ball effect execution determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the ball effect.

  FIG. 44 to FIG. 48 show an example of the pseudo continuous chance effect. As shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the fluctuation display of the identification information is started in each of the fluctuation display areas 42a, 42b and 42c set in the main display device 41. A special figure variation display game is executed. It should be noted that, in the variable display area set behind the partition wall 631, the variable display game is displayed along with the identification information stopped and displayed in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c while indicating that the variable display game is being executed. Variation display of the fourth symbol (black and white potch portion in FIG. 44) for deriving the result is performed. Here, a variation effect pattern that can execute at least a re-variation display (pseudo variation) two or more times is selected as a variation effect pattern that can execute a pseudo-continuous chance effect, and the storage channel of the ball storage unit 740 The game ball is stored in 742, and the execution condition of the pseudo consecutive chance effect is satisfied, and the pseudo continuous chance effect is started before the temporary stop timing of the first identification information.

  In the ball release chance period, as shown in FIG. 44B, the sub display device 801 is moved to a position that does not overlap the variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c on the main display device 41, and the display unit 802 displays a “pseudo continuous chance”. "Is displayed. In addition, in the main display device 41, in order to instruct to discharge the stored game balls by operating the effect buttons 25, the progress explanation information (auxiliary information) of “Put a ball in the center hole by button operation!” Display is made. Further, rotation of the effect rotating body 753 and light emission by the LED board 769 are started, and the inflow state of the game ball to the specific inflow port 767a is changed to improve the game performance of the ball effect. The progress explanation information may be displayed on the sub display device 801. By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player grasp the progress of the pseudo-continuous chance effect (ball effect).

  When the player operates the effect button 25, the storage control solenoid 745a operates to discharge one game ball, and the stored game ball is discharged to the ball display channel 751 as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), it flows into the distribution area 764. In this case, the game ball has arrived at the timing when the rotating effect rotating body 753 is in an allowable state in which the inflow allowable recess 753a coincides with the specific inflow port 767a up and down, and the game ball flows into the specific inflow port 767a. To do.

  In this way, the game ball stored based on the operation of the effect button 25 is discharged, and the willingness to discharge the game ball so that the game ball flows into the specific inlet 767a in the ball effect. Can be given to the player and the interest of the ball production is improved. In addition, it is left to the player's free will whether or not to change the effect mode of the special figure variation display game, and the range of game characteristics is widened.

  The inflow of the game ball into the specific inlet 767a is detected by the specific ball sensor 752, and based on this, execution of re-variation display (pseudo continuous variation) is determined. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the sub display device 801 returns to the standby area 830, and the progress explanation information (auxiliary information) “continue” is displayed on the display unit 802, and the re-variable display is performed. The identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing. When the identification information is temporarily stopped, the identification information is displayed so as to be shaken so that the temporary stop can be visually recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), re-variable display is performed with the end of the temporary stop period of the identification information, and a ball discharge chance period is reached. After that, it is possible to repeatedly execute the above-described effects as many times as possible for the re-variable display according to the variation pattern, and then to reach the corresponding effects according to the variation pattern.

  FIG. 46 shows a case where the game ball does not flow into the specific inlet 767a in the pseudo continuous chance effect. As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the game ball arrives at a timing when the effect rotating body 753 rotates so that the inflow allowable recess 753a is in a restricted state that does not coincide with the specific inflow port 767a, the game ball is discharged from the outlet. 764c. As described above, when the game ball does not flow into the specific inlet 767a and the ball release chance period ends (time up), the sub display device 801 returns to the standby area 830 as shown in FIG. The progress explanation information (auxiliary information) “failure” is displayed on the part 802, and it is notified that the temporary stop and re-change display of the identification information are not performed.

  Then, the pseudo-continuous chance effect ends, the rotation of the effect rotation body 753 stops, and the variable region increase effect is started as shown in FIG. Here, since the re-variation display is scheduled to be performed twice thereafter, the display area of the main display device 41 is divided into three, and the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed independently in each area. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), the variation display is sequentially stopped and the result mode is displayed. The variation effect pattern selected in this special figure variation display game is a variation effect pattern that reaches the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the decoration special diagram variation display game in the area where the variation display finally stops. Then we reach a reach state. Thereafter, the division of the screen is canceled, and only the decorative special figure variation display game in the reached area is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), an effect is produced by rotating the effect rotating body 753 with the occurrence of the reach state. Even in the special figure variation display game in which the pseudo-continuous chance effect is not performed, the effect rotating body 753 disposed so as to overlap the front of the display unit 41a is rotated, and the effect rotating body 753 is rotated by the LED board 769. It is possible to produce an effect by emitting light. Thereby, even when the ball effect is not performed by the effect rotating body 753, the special figure fluctuation display game can be excited. In this case, the rotation is performed in the opposite direction to the case of the pseudo continuous chance effect, but the rotation may be performed in the same direction. Also, it is preferable to rotate at a higher speed than in the case of pseudo-chance chance effects. In addition, it becomes easy to understand that it is the effect (swing effect) that excites the decoration special figure change display game by setting the rotation mode different from the case of the pseudo-continuous chance effect.

  In FIG. 48, the execution mode of the production | presentation in the fluctuation production pattern of the same fluctuation time was shown. FIG. 48A shows the case of a variable effect pattern in which the execution of the pseudo consecutive chance effect is not selected. In this case, the variation display in the variation display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is sequentially stopped so that the reach state is reached in the first half variation time from the start of the special figure variation display game (t1) to the occurrence of the reach state (t2). The change before reach is performed, and reach change is performed in which the effect is achieved in the reach state in the second half change time from the occurrence of the reach state (t2) to the end of the special figure change display game (t3).

  FIGS. 48 (b) to 48 (f) show the case of a variation effect pattern in which a pseudo-continuous chance effect can be executed. In this variation effect pattern, three revariable displays can be executed in the first half variation time (t1 to t2). 48 (b) to 48 (d) show a case where there is a storage ball and the execution of the pseudo continuous chance effect is selected, and FIG. 48 (f) shows a case where there is no storage ball and the execution of the pseudo continuous chance effect is not selected. It is.

  FIG. 48B shows a case where the game balls discharged to the ball effect unit 750 in each ball release chance period flow into the specific inflow port 767a. With the start of the special figure variation display game (t1), the variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation becomes a pseudo one variation (t1 to t12) in which the identification information can be temporarily stopped. In this pseudo 1 variation, a ball release chance period is set, and the game ball discharged to the ball effect unit 750 flows into the specific inflow port 767a (t11). Based on this, execution of the re-variation display is determined, and the identification information is temporarily stopped at the end timing of the pseudo 1 variation (see t12 in FIG. 45B).

  Thereafter, the change information of the temporarily stopped identification information is displayed (t12), and the pseudo information is changed to 2 that allows the identification information to be temporarily stopped (from t12 to t14). The ball release chance period is set even in this pseudo 2 fluctuation, and the game ball discharged to the ball effect unit 750 flows into the specific inlet 767a (t13). Based on this, execution of re-variation display is determined, and the identification information is temporarily stopped at the end timing of the pseudo 2 variation (see t14, FIG. 45 (b)).

  Then, re-variation display of the identification information that has been temporarily stopped is performed in the same manner as the above-described pseudo 2 variation (t14), and the pseudo 3 variation in which the identification information can be temporarily stopped is generated (t14 to t16). The ball release chance period is set even in this pseudo-3 variation, and the game ball discharged to the ball effect unit 750 flows into the specific inflow port 767a (t15). Based on this, execution of re-variation display is determined, and the identification information is temporarily stopped at the end of the pseudo-3 variation (see t16, FIG. 45 (b)).

  Thereafter, the re-variation display of the temporarily stopped identification information is performed (t16), but in this variation effect pattern, the re-variable display can be executed up to three times, so the pseudo-continuous chance effect ends here. Thus, the pre-reach fluctuation occurs (from t16 to t2), the reach state occurs, the first half fluctuation time ends, and the second half fluctuation time that becomes reach fluctuation starts (t2).

  FIG. 48C shows a case where the game ball discharged to the ball effect unit 750 does not flow into the specific inflow port 767a during the ball release chance period in the pseudo 3 variation. In the pseudo 1 variation and the pseudo 2 variation, as in the case of FIG. 48B, the game ball discharged to the ball effect unit 750 in the ball release chance period flows into the specific inlet 767a, and the temporary stop and restart of the identification information are performed. Fluctuation display is performed (from t1 to t24).

  Then, the game balls discharged to the ball effect unit 750 in the ball release chance period in the pseudo 3 change do not flow into the specific inflow port 767a, and the pseudo continuous chance effect ends and changes based on the end of the ball release chance period. An area increase effect is started, resulting in a screen division variation (from t25 to t2). In this case, since the remaining one re-variable display is scheduled, the display area of the main display device 41 is divided into two in the variable area increasing effect, and the decorative special figure variable display game is independently played in each area. indicate. Finally, the reach state occurs in the area where the result mode is stopped and displayed, the first half fluctuation time ends, and the second half fluctuation time which becomes reach fluctuation starts (t2).

  FIG. 48D shows a case where the game ball discharged to the ball effect unit 750 does not flow into the specific inflow port 767a during the ball release chance period in the pseudo 2 variation. In this case, on the basis of the end of the ball release chance period in the pseudo 2 variation, the pseudo continuous chance effect is terminated and the variation area increasing effect is started, resulting in a screen division variation (from t33 to t2). Here, since the remaining two re-variable displays are scheduled, the display area of the main display device 41 is divided into three in the variable area increasing effect, and the decorative special figure variable display game is displayed independently in each area. To do. Finally, the reach state occurs in the area where the result mode is stopped and displayed, the first half fluctuation time ends, and the second half fluctuation time which becomes reach fluctuation starts (t2).

  FIG. 48 (e) shows a case where the game ball discharged to the ball effect unit 750 does not flow into the specific inlet 767a during the ball release chance period in the pseudo 1 variation. In this case, on the basis of the end of the ball release chance period in the pseudo 1 variation, the pseudo continuous chance effect is terminated and the variation area increasing effect is started, resulting in a screen division variation (from t41 to t2). Here, since the remaining three re-variable displays are scheduled, the display area of the main display device 41 is divided into four in the variable area increasing effect, and the decorative special figure variable display game is displayed independently in each area. To do. Finally, the reach state occurs in the area where the result mode is stopped and displayed, the first half fluctuation time ends, and the second half fluctuation time which becomes reach fluctuation starts (t2).

  FIG. 48 (f) shows a variation effect pattern in which a pseudo-continuous chance effect can be executed, but there is no stored ball and execution of the pseudo-continuous chance effect is not selected. In this case, in the first half fluctuation time (from t1 to t2), reach fluctuation fluctuation is performed to produce an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur if reach is reached.

  With such a ball effect, the execution mode of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed can be changed according to the rolling result of the stored game balls, and the special figure fluctuation display game is specially selected according to the result of the ball effect. It is possible to make the player think that the resulting opportunity has expanded and to improve the interest of the game. 48 (b) to (f), the content of the effect varies depending on the result of rolling the game ball discharged to the ball effect unit 750 and the presence / absence of the stored ball, but the first half variation time (t1 to t2) and the second half variation. The length of time (t2 to t3) is unchanged regardless of the contents of the production. In this way, by making the change time invariable regardless of the effect contents, it is possible to prevent the execution time of the special figure change display game from being unnecessarily extended by the execution of the ball effect and to reduce the operation of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  Based on the above, the display based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (the first special figure 1 start winning port 36, the second special figure 1 start winning port 641, the normal variable winning device 37) provided in the game area 32. When a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information is executed by the devices (Special Figure 1 Display 51, Special Figure 2 Display 52, Main Display 41, Sub Display 801), and the variable display game has a special result In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, an operation unit (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and a entrance (second second) through which a game ball flowing down the game area 32 can flow. Special variation winning device 39), a ball storage unit (storage channel 742) capable of receiving and storing game balls flowing into the entrance, and discharging the stored game balls, and a ball storage unit Locating game balls released from A ball effect unit (ball effect unit 750) capable of performing a ball effect as to whether or not to flow into the area (specific inlet 767a), and the operation unit being operated during the execution of the variable display game. , A ball effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a ball effect by releasing a game ball from the ball storage unit, and whether or not the game ball is flowing into a specific area in the ball effect It is provided with the production mode change means (production control device 300) capable of changing the production mode of the variable display game.

  The variation display game is executed by any one of a plurality of variation display patterns having different execution times, and the effect mode changing means (the effect control device 300) identifies the change display game being executed without changing the execution time. The change mode of information is changed.

  In addition, when the game ball flows into the specific area (specific inflow port 767a) in the ball effect, the effect mode changing means (the effect control device 300) performs a temporary continuous effect by temporarily stopping and re-changing the identification information. Will be generated.

  Further, the ball effect execution means (effect control device 300) can execute a ball effect multiple times in one variation display game, and the effect mode change means (effect control device 300) can specify a specific area (specification) in the ball effect. Each time a game ball flows into the inflow port 767a), a pseudo-continuous effect for temporarily stopping and re-changing the identification information is generated.

  In addition, it includes execution number determination means (effect control device 300) capable of determining the number of executions of the ball effect that can be executed in the variable display game according to the type of the variable display pattern of the variable display game. The execution means (the effect control device 300) determines the specific in the variable display game when the game ball does not flow into the specific region (specific inflow port 767a) in any one of the multiple ball effects in the single variable display game. The execution of the ball effect after the ball effect in which the game ball did not flow into the area is stopped.

  In addition, a storage determination unit (effect control device 300, stored ball sensor 746a) capable of determining whether or not a game ball is stored in the ball storage unit (storage channel 742), and a ball effect execution unit (effect) And a ball effect execution determining means (effect control device 300) capable of determining whether or not to execute the ball effect by the control device 300), and the ball effect execution determining means (effect control device 300) is at least When it is determined that the game ball is stored by the storage determination means and the execution time of the variable display game is executed by a specific fluctuation pattern longer than a predetermined time, execution of the ball effect is determined. Will be.

  Further, an inflow restricting member (effect rotating body 753) that can be converted into a restricting state that restricts the inflow of game balls into the specific region (specific inflow port 767a) and an allowable state that permits the inflow of game balls into the specific region. And an operation control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the operation of the inflow restricting member, and the operation control means (effect control device 300) is configured to perform the ball effect in the variable display game in which the ball effect is not executed. This means that the inflow restricting member is operated in an operation mode different from the case of executing the above.

  In addition, although the pseudo-continuous chance effect is ended based on the passage (time up) of the ball release chance period, a sensor for detecting a game ball is also provided in the discharge port 764c, and the inflow to the discharge port 764c is detected. The pseudo-ream chance production may end. Further, the operation of the effect button 25 may be performed only once in one ball discharge chance period. Also, a plurality of game balls may be discharged by operating one effect button 25. Further, the number of stored balls may be detected by a sensor, and the maximum number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect may be set according to the number of stored balls.

  Further, the rotation direction of the effect rotating body 753 may be not only in one direction but also in both directions, and the rotation speed may be not only constant but also changed. Further, although the ball storage unit 740 is provided on the left side of the main display device 41, it may be provided on the right side or on both the left and right sides.

  In addition, the maximum number of game balls that can be stored in the ball storage unit 740 may be the same as the maximum number of pseudo-reams that is the maximum number of re-variable displays that can be executed in one special figure variable display game, or more. It may be less than that. In addition, the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened in the small hit without the operation of the condition device (the hit generated when the variable display game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 becomes the small hit result mode) ( In the case of a small hit, the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened), and the game balls may be easily stored in the ball storage unit 740. In addition, during the period in which the ball effect can be executed by the stored ball effect device 730, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened after the end of the special game state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is released or as in the above-mentioned small hit. It may be limited to a predetermined period after being performed.

  In addition, the game balls won in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are stored in the ball storage unit 740, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game entrance through which the game balls flowing down the game area 32 can flow is provided. The game ball that has flowed into the game (the game result is confirmed) may be stored. Furthermore, the game sphere stored in the ball storage unit 740 may be a game sphere (effect sphere) that is not used for a game, instead of a game sphere that flows down the game area 32.

  Next, description will be made regarding selection of the effect mode, selection of the change effect pattern, and switching of effects during reach. FIG. 49 shows a variation effect pattern corresponding to the first effect mode (first game mode) and a change effect pattern corresponding to the second effect mode (second game mode). The effect control device 300 selects and executes the change effect pattern based on the change pattern determined by the game control device 100 and the current effect mode. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect display unit that can execute effect display in any of a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the variation pattern executed by the variation display game execution unit (game control device 100).

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the result is out of place, in each variation effect pattern of no reach, normal reach, and SP1 reach, only the background is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. ing. These variation effect patterns have the same contents (effect modes) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and each variation effect pattern has a one-to-one correspondence with the variation pattern selected by the game control device 100. doing.

  Moreover, in SP2 reach and SP3 reach, a variation effect pattern having different contents in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is selected with respect to the change pattern selected by the game control device 100. That is, two variation effect patterns, a variation effect pattern for the first effect mode and a variation effect pattern for the second effect mode, correspond to one variation pattern, and depending on the currently selected effect mode. Is selected.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case of SP2 reach and SP3 reach in which the variation effect patterns selected in the first effect mode and the second effect mode are different, the execution is being performed based on the player's effect switching operation during the reach effect. It is possible to switch to another effect mode (variation effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern. That is, the change effect pattern for the first effect mode and the change effect pattern for the second effect mode can be switched. For example, either the SP2 change effect pattern A1 or the SP2 change effect pattern B1 is selected. In the case of the variation pattern to be selected, the variation effect pattern to be displayed can be switched every time the effect switching operation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the result is a big hit, in the variation effect patterns of the normal reach, the SP1 reach, and the SP4 reach, only the background differs in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It has become. These variation effect patterns have the same contents (effect modes) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and each variation effect pattern has a one-to-one correspondence with the variation pattern selected by the game control device 100. doing. The SP4 reach is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the result is a big hit in the second special figure variation display game. When the SP4 reach is selected and the special result is a special result for operating the second special variable winning device 39, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in the special gaming state based on the special result. The SP4 variation effect pattern 1 for performing the auxiliary game suggesting the number of times is selected. In other cases, the SP4 variation effect pattern 2 is selected.

  Moreover, in SP2 reach and SP3 reach, a variation effect pattern having different contents in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is selected with respect to the change pattern selected by the game control device 100. That is, two variation effect patterns, a variation effect pattern for the first effect mode and a variation effect pattern for the second effect mode, correspond to one variation pattern, and depending on the currently selected effect mode. Is selected.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case of SP2 reach and SP3 reach in which the variation effect patterns selected in the first effect mode and the second effect mode are different, the execution is being performed based on the player's effect switching operation during the reach effect. It is possible to switch to another effect mode (variation effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern. That is, the change effect pattern for the first effect mode and the change effect pattern for the second effect mode can be switched. For example, either the SP2 change effect pattern C1 or the SP2 change effect pattern D1 is selected. In the case of the variation pattern to be selected, the variation effect pattern to be displayed can be switched every time the effect switching operation is performed. Furthermore, when the player performs an effect switching operation, the SP2 variation effect pattern E or the SP3 variation effect pattern E is switched with a predetermined probability. This variation effect pattern E is an effect variation pattern that can appear only when the result is a big hit, and is an effect that definitely notifies that it is a big hit.

  That is, the variation pattern (here, no reach, normal reach, SP1 reach, and SP4 reach variation pattern) associated with the common variation effect pattern in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is the first change pattern, Variation patterns (here, SP2 reach and SP3 reach) in which different variation effect patterns are associated with each other in the first effect mode and the second effect mode form the second change pattern. Here, the effect mode can be switched in a reach state (SP2 reach and SP3 reach) that has a sense of expectation as a special result, and this can prompt the player to perform a switching operation.

[Variation effect switching processing]
Next, details of the changing effect switching process (step B215) in the above-described changing process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the variable effect switching process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 first determines whether it is an effect switching effect pattern (step B231). The effect switching effect pattern is a variation effect pattern in which different variation effect patterns are selected in accordance with the variation pattern in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and as shown in FIG. 49, the SP2 reach and the SP3 reach. It is a corresponding variation production pattern.

  If it is not this effect switching effect pattern (step B231; No), the variation effect switching process is terminated. If it is the effect switching effect pattern (step B231; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the effect switchable timing (step B232). The effect switchable timing is a predetermined period in the reach state, for example, a period from when the reach state is reached until the result mode is derived. When it is not this effect switchable timing (step B232; No), the variable effect switching process is terminated. If it is the timing for effect switching (step B232; Yes), it is determined whether there is an effect switching operation (step B233).

  The effect switching operation is an operation of the effect button 25 by the player, and when there is no effect switching operation (step B233; No), the variation effect switching process is ended. When there is an effect switching operation (step B233; Yes), a variation effect pattern corresponding to the currently performed variation effect pattern is selected (step B234). The variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation effect pattern being executed is a variation effect pattern that is not being executed among the variation effect patterns that can be selected for one variation pattern. For example, the SP2 variation effect pattern A1 is executed. If it is in the middle, the SP2 variation effect pattern B1 is selected.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a hit variation effect, which is a variation effect in the special figure variation display game that is a big hit, is determined (step B235). If the hit variation effect is not being performed (step B235; No), the selected variation effect pattern is selected. Is executed (step B238), and the changing effect switching process is terminated.

  Further, when the winning variation effect is being performed (step B235; Yes), it is determined whether or not the premier lottery has been won (step B236), and when not winning (step B236; The execution of the changing effect by the pattern is set (step B238), and the changing effect switching process is ended. When winning (step B236; Yes), a premier variation effect pattern (SP2 variation effect pattern E or SP3 variation effect pattern E) corresponding to the currently performed variation effect pattern is selected (step B237), and the selected variation is selected. Execution of the changing effect by the effect pattern is set (step B238), and the changing effect switching process is ended. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect mode switching unit that can switch the effect mode of the effect display being executed by the effect display device (the effect control device 300) based on the switching operation during the variable display game.

  FIG. 51 to FIG. 54 show an example of switching the changing effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 51A, when the reach effect is not displayed, the identification information is variably displayed in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c set in the center of the display unit 41a of the main display device 41. . In the storage display area 43 set at the lower right, a hold display 47 corresponding to the first start memory (here, one) and a hold display 47 corresponding to the stored second start memory (here, 0). Is displayed. Note that the hold display 47 corresponding to the second start memory that is preferentially digested is displayed so as to overlap the hold display 47 corresponding to the first start memory. Further, the current effect mode is displayed on the upper effect mode display unit 41d, and here, the first effect mode (empire mode) is set.

  Then, when the SP reach effect that can be switched is started as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the main effect display that is the reach effect mainly in the place where the central variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c are displayed is displayed. Effect display area 41e, and the variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c move to the upper right side. The reach production here is an effect that shows that if the Imperial army and the allied army fight and the Imperial army wins, it is a big hit, and if the Imperial army loses, it will be out of play. When the player has selected the imperial mode which is the first effect mode, the effect is performed from the viewpoint of the imperial army, and if the imperial army wins, it becomes a big hit, and if it loses, it is lost. In addition, when the alliance mode that is the second effect mode is selected, the alliance army side effect is performed, and if the alliance army loses, it is a big hit, and if it wins, it will be lost.

  When the imperial mode that is the first effect mode is selected as shown in FIG. 51 (b), first, the imperial army is a variable effect pattern corresponding to the imperial mode that is the present effect mode as the reach effect. Is displayed. Then, a zapping window 41f that displays a sub-effect display that is an effect display at the switching destination (a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation effect pattern being executed) is displayed in a part of the effect display area 41e. The allied side production is displayed. Thus, by displaying the effect display of the switching destination in the zapping window 41f, the player can immediately grasp the effect aspect after switching, and can select any effect aspect by the switching operation. .

  When the player operates the effect button 25, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the main effect display displayed in the effect display area 41e is switched to the allied effect, and the sub effect display displayed in the zapping window 41f is displayed. Directed by the Imperial Army. However, even when the reach effect is switched, the effect mode itself is not switched and the imperial mode which is the first effect mode is maintained. Thus, every time the player operates the effect button 25, the effect on the imperial army side and the effect on the allied side, that is, the change effect pattern for the first effect mode and the change effect pattern for the second effect mode are switched. Is possible. The imperial army side effect and the Allied side side effect are performed in parallel, and the effect mode after switching starts from the same progress state as the effect mode before switching. Thereby, even if the effect mode of effect display is switched, it becomes unnecessary to perform complicated processing such as changing the variation pattern, and the burden of control can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (d), when the imperial army side effect progresses as the main effect display, and the result is out of order, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the imperial army loses the effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), the result mode of the deviation is displayed, and the special figure variation display game is ended. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52 (d), the next special figure variation display game is started. If the result is a big hit, the Imperial army wins as shown in FIGS. 52 (e) and 52 (f), and the special result is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (g). As shown in h), the special gaming state is started.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 51 (g), when the allied side effect progresses as the main effect display and the result is out of place, the allied force wins as shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b). An effect (losing the Imperial Army) is made, and as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the result mode of the loss is displayed, and the special figure variation display game is ended. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (d), the next special figure variation display game is started. If the result is a big hit, the allied army loses (imperial army wins) as shown in FIGS. 53 (e) and 53 (f), and a special result is displayed as shown in FIG. 53 (g). Then, the special gaming state is started as shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the reach state where the result is a big hit as shown in FIG. 54 (a) and the switchable reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 54 (b) and 54 (c), the player selects the effect button. When 25 is operated, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), the switching-time-limited premier effect (special effect mode, SP2 variation effect pattern E or SP3 variation effect pattern E) is switched with a predetermined probability. This switching-time limited premiere effect is different from the above-mentioned imperial army side effect or allied side side effect, and is an effect that appears only when it is a big hit. In addition, when the switching-time limited premiere effect is selected, a big hit confirmation notification sound is output simultaneously with the switching. By setting such a limited time-limited premier effect (special effect mode), the player can be surprised and delighted. In addition, by expecting the appearance of a limited-time premiere effect, it is possible to prompt the user to perform an effect mode switching operation.

  Note that the likelihood of a big hit may be indicated by the color of the frame of the zapping window 41f. Further, when the switching-time limited premiere effect is selected, subsequent switching operations may be invalidated. In addition, the switching limited-time premier effect may be an effect having the same execution time as the reach effect, or may be displayed for a predetermined time during the switching operation (so-called cut-in), or a specific image (background or character) for the reach effect. ) May be displayed.

  Thus, since the effect display mode is switched by the switching operation of the player, the variable display game can be repeatedly executed without getting the player bored, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the effect mode can be switched for each switching operation, it is possible to show the player a plurality of effect modes in the same variable display game, and the interest of the game can be effectively improved. Furthermore, by setting whether or not the effect mode switching control is possible depending on the type of the variation pattern, the control load of the effect mode switching control can be reduced.

  From the above, the start winning area (the first special figure 1 start winning port 36, the second special figure 1 start winning port 641, the normal variable winning device) that generates the start right of the variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner. 37) and a display device 41 (main display device 41) for effect display of the variation display game, and the variation display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the result that the result has been determined in advance, an operation unit (effect button 25) that allows the player to perform a predetermined switching operation; Fluctuation display game execution means (game control device 100) capable of executing a fluctuation display game according to any of a plurality of fluctuation patterns for variably displaying the identification information, and fluctuation display game execution means The effect display means is executed based on the effect display means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect display in any of a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the change pattern to be executed, and the switching operation during the change display game. And an effect mode switching means (effect control device 300) capable of switching the effect mode of the effect display inside, and the variation pattern includes a first variation pattern in which a single effect mode is associated with the effect display. And a second variation pattern in which a plurality of effect modes are associated with the effect display, and when the effect display according to the second variation pattern is executed, the effect mode switching means determines the effect mode of the effect display. This means that switching to another effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern being executed is performed.

  Further, the effect mode switching means (effect control device 300) performs another effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern in which the effect mode of the effect display is being executed for each switching operation during the switchable period set during the variable display game. Will be switched to.

  In addition, the switchable period is set between the reach state where the variable display game may have a special result and the time when the variable display game derives the result.

  In addition, when the effect mode switching means (effect control device 300) switches the effect mode of the effect display to another effect mode, the effect mode after switching is started from the same progress state as the effect mode before switching. It will be done.

  The effect display includes a main effect display mainly displayed on the display unit 41a of the main display device 41 and a sub effect display reduced and displayed on a part of the display unit 41a. 300) displays the effect display being executed as the main effect display, while displaying other effect modes that are candidates for switching as the sub-effect display. The effect display switching means (effect control device 300) The effect mode is switched by switching the main effect display and the sub effect display displayed on the display unit 41a.

  The effect mode of the effect display includes a special effect mode that suggests that the variable display game has a special result without corresponding to the change pattern, and the effect mode switching means (the effect control device 300) When the switching operation is performed during the fluctuating display game, the effect mode of effect display is switched to the special effect mode with a predetermined probability.

  Next, an effect accompanied by the operation of the sub display device 801 will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, notification and suggestion of the execution mode and result of the special figure variation display game are performed by the operation of the sub display device 801 and the display on the display unit 802. Note that the effects accompanying the operation of the sub display device 801 as described below are the actor action pattern settings in the changing process (FIG. 42) in accordance with the result of the special figure change display game and the selected change effect pattern. It is set in the process (step B207) and the process of setting the scene sequence table (step B210), and is realized by sequentially executing the scene as the special figure variation display game progresses. Note that a zapping window 41f (so-called wipe) may be displayed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 in the standby area 830.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), it is possible to execute an auxiliary effect that performs a display suggesting an execution mode of the special figure variation display game on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 in the standby area 830. Here, displaying “reach?” On the display unit 802 indicates that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state (notice effect).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), after the variable display in the left variable display area 42a is stopped, the sub display device 801 is still in the variable display state with the display unit 802 facing backward. The variation display region (here, the right variation display region 42c) is moved so as to cover the front, and the one variation as shown in FIGS. 55 (c), (e), 56 (a), and 57 (a). It is possible to perform an auxiliary effect in which the display unit 802 is rotated to face forward at the stop timing of the change display in the display area (here, the right change display area 42c). This makes it possible to perform an auxiliary effect without hindering the visual recognition of the identification information that has already been stopped or temporarily stopped in another variable display area (here, the left variable display area 42a). Further, it is possible to perform a stop display effect of identification information having a stereoscopic effect that cannot be expressed by the main display device 41 alone.

  When the sub display device 801 is moved so as to cover the front of any of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c that are still in the variable display state with the display unit 802 facing rearward, the rotation drive unit 810 The sub-display device 801 is swung around the shaft portion 803 so that it can be visually recognized that the variable display is being performed.

  The example shown in FIG. 55 (c) is a case where there is a shift without reaching the reach state, and the identification information of the left variation display area 42a already stopped (temporarily stopped) is displayed on the display unit 802 facing forward. Different identification information is displayed on the display unit 802, indicating that the reach state is not reached. At this time, since the identification information is temporarily stopped on the display unit 802, the identification information is displayed so as to be shaken so that the temporary stop can be visually recognized. In addition, the sub display device 801 may be swung around the shaft portion 803 by the rotation driving unit 810 so that the temporary stop can be visually recognized.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the sub display device 801 returns to the standby area 830 and the display on the display unit 802 is changed to “sorry”. At this time, the same identification information as that displayed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 is displayed in the right variation display area 42c of the main display device 41 covered with the sub display device 801. At the same time, the fluctuation display in the middle fluctuation display area 42b is stopped, the result mode of the deviation is displayed on the main display device 41, and the special figure fluctuation display game ends. Note that identification information that is different from the identification information displayed on the display unit 802 (identification information that is the same as the left fluctuation display area 42a) may be displayed in the right fluctuation display area 42c to generate a reach state. In this way, an unexpected feeling is increased and the interest of the variable display game is improved.

  The example shown in FIG. 55 (e) is a case of pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 is turned forward after stopping the fluctuation display in the middle fluctuation display area 42b with the identification information that does not reach the reach state. . The display unit 802 displays a pseudo-continuous symbol “REP pseudo”, and informs that a pseudo-variation and re-variation display is performed. In the case where the variation is not pseudo continuous variation, an auxiliary effect of stopping and displaying identification information different from the left variation display region 42 and the middle variation display region 42b on the display unit 802 may be performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), re-variation display (pseudo-continuous variation) is performed, and thereafter, display of the result mode of detachment, execution of temporary stop and re-variation display, development to reach state, etc. Is done. Here, while the sub display device 801 is positioned in front of the right variation display area 42c, the display of the right variation display area 42c is performed on the display unit 802. However, the sub display device 801 is displayed in the standby area. It is also possible to return to 830 and perform the variable display only with the main display device 41.

  The example shown in FIG. 56A is a case where the reach state is reached, and the same identification information as the identification information of the left variation display area 42a already stopped is displayed on the display unit 802 on the display unit 802 facing forward. It will be in a reach state. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the sub display device 801 returns to the standby area 830, and a display (notice effect) is displayed on the display unit 802 to suggest development to SP reach or the like. . At this time, the same identification information as that displayed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 is displayed in the right variation display area 42c of the main display device 41 covered with the sub display device 801.

  If it does not develop into SP reach, the display on the display unit 802 is changed to “reach” as shown in FIG. 56 (c), and the result mode (here, off) is displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (d). The special figure variation display game ends. Further, in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 56 (e), “REP pseudo” for notifying execution of re-variation display is displayed in the middle fluctuation display area 42b, as shown in FIG. 56 (f). Thus, re-variable display is performed. Of course, there is also a case where the SP reach is developed. In this case, the SP reach is achieved through the display of the development symbol as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 57 (a) also shows the case where the reach state is reached. In this example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), after the sub display device 801 is once returned to the standby area 830, the display unit 802 is moved backward. In this state, the sub display device 801 is moved again so as to cover the front of the middle variation display area 42b that is still displaying the variation. Such multiple movements of the sub-display device 801 are determined by the effect control device 300 based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game and the selected fluctuation effect pattern. A plurality of movements are selected with a higher probability when the result is a big hit than when the result is a loss. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as a movement number setting unit that can set the number of movements of the sub display device 801 by the movement unit (slide mechanism 820).

  In other words, by performing the auxiliary display repeatedly in accordance with the order of the stop display of the identification information by the plurality of operations of the sub display device 801, an effect indicating that the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher is effectively performed. In addition, by associating the movement of the sub display device 801 with the expectation level of the special figure variation display game, the player's interest can be attracted to the number of times the sub display device 801 is moved. In addition, in accordance with the re-operation of the sub display device 801, an effect is also produced by the rotation of the effect rotating body 753, which suggests that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the case of long reach (normal reach), as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the display unit 802 is rotated forward so that the display unit 802 is turned forward before the change display stop timing. As shown in FIG. 57 (d), the variable display is stopped, and the result mode (in this case, off) is displayed. Further, in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 57 (e), the display unit 802 is rotated forward at the stop timing of the variable display, and the display unit 802 is notified of the execution of re-variable display. “REP simulation” is displayed, and re-variation display is performed as shown in FIG. Here, while the sub display device 801 is positioned in front of the middle fluctuation display area 42b, the middle display area 802 is displayed on the display unit 802. However, the sub display device 801 is placed in the standby area. It is also possible to return to 830 and perform the variable display only with the main display device 41.

  In the case of developing to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 58C, the display unit 802 is rotated forward at the stop timing of the variable display, and the display unit 802 is notified of the development to SP reach. Display the development pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the SP reach state is set, the sub display device 801 is returned to the standby area 830, and the rotation of the effect rotating body 753 is stopped. At this time, the display unit 802 displays “Gekiatsu!” To notify that the expectation level of the big hit is high.

  As a notification of such development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the display of the change in the left change display area 42a is first stopped, and the sub display device positioned in front of the right change display area 42c. It is also possible to make a notification by displaying the developed symbol in the middle fluctuation display area 42b from the reach state generated by displaying the same identification information as the left fluctuation display area 42a on the display unit 802 of 801. Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), it is possible to make a notification by displaying the developed symbol in a state where the sub display device 801 is in the standby area 830. In this case, “CHANCE” is displayed on the display unit 802. In particular, we will announce the development of SP reach.

  By such an operation of the sub display device 801 and display on the display unit 802, the sub display device 801 blocks or exposes identification information displayed in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c of the main display device 41. Therefore, it is possible to produce an unprecedented performance and to improve the interest of the game. Note that when the sub display device 801 with the back surface facing forward is rotated in front of the main display device 41 so that the front surface is directed forward, the information is notified by the display of the display unit 802 that is visible. A notice image, an effect, an expectation degree suggestion image, and the like are displayed on the display area of the main display device 41 that is located behind the device 801 and becomes visible in the process of rotating the sub display device 801. In addition to the information to be notified, further information may be provided.

  As described above, in the gaming machine including the main display device 41 that can display the main effect accompanying the progress of the game and the sub display device 801 that can display the auxiliary effect of the main effect, the display unit of the main display device 41 Moving means (sliding mechanism 820) capable of moving the sub display device 801 in front of 41a, and front / back reversal capable of reversing the front side and the back side of the sub display device 801 at a position after movement by the moving means Means (rotation drive unit 810) and operation control means (production control device 300) for controlling the operation of the sub display device 801 by the moving means and the front / back reversing means.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays, on the main display device 41, a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c as a main effect, and the variable display game is determined in advance. When a special result is obtained, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and the motion control means (the effect control device 300) is a moving means (sliding mechanism 820) according to the progress state of the variable display game. ), The sub display device 801 can be moved in front of any of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c.

  Further, when moving the sub display device 801 during the variable display game, the motion control means (the effect control device 300) moves the sub display device 801 in front of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c that are still in the variable display. It is supposed to be moved.

  The variation display game is performed by stopping and displaying the identification information in a predetermined order in the plurality of variation display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c, and the motion control means (the effect control device 300) performs identification information in the variation display game. It is possible to repeat the movement of the sub display device 801 to the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c where the identification information stops in accordance with the stop display order.

  Further, the operation control means (effect control apparatus 300) includes movement number setting means (effect control apparatus 300) capable of setting the number of movements of the sub display device 801 by the movement means (slide mechanism 820). The setting means sets the number of times of movement of the sub display device 801 with a higher probability as the expectation that the variable display game will have a special result is higher.

  In addition, the auxiliary display control unit (production control device 300) capable of displaying the auxiliary production on the sub display device 801 is provided, and the auxiliary production control unit (production control device 300) performs the sub display in the progress process of the variable display game. The identification information temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c located behind the device 801 can be temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 801 as an auxiliary effect.

  The front / back reversing means (production control device 300) is configured to reverse the front and back of the sub display device 801 by rotating the sub display device 801 about the rotation shaft (shaft portion 803). When the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 801 in the course of the variable display game, the means (the effect control device 300) causes the sub display device 801 to swing around the rotation axis. Will be.

  Further, in a gaming machine including a main display device 41 capable of displaying a main effect accompanying the progress of a game and a sub display device 801 capable of displaying an auxiliary effect of the main effect, the sub display device 801 has an auxiliary effect on the front side. Display area (display unit 802) is set, and a decorative part is provided on the back side, and the sub display device 801 is in a first state in which the front side is visible and a second state in which the back side is visible. State conversion means (rotation drive unit 810) capable of conversion, and moving means (in which the sub display device 801 whose state is converted by the state conversion means can be moved in front of the display unit 41a of the main display device 41) Slide mechanism 820) and operation control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the operation of the sub display device 801 by the moving means and the state converting means. .

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays, on the main display device 41, a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c as a main effect, and the variable display game is determined in advance. When a special result is obtained, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and the sub display device 801 is set to the main display device 41 in a state where the front and back sides are directed forward. The variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c are set to a size that can be shielded, and the motion control means (production control device 300) is moved by the moving means (slide mechanism 820) according to the progress state of the variable display game. The sub display device 801 can be moved in front of one of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c.

  Further, the sub display device 801 is provided with a front / back reversing means (rotation drive unit 810) capable of rotating the sub display device 801 and reversing the front side and the back side, and the operation control means (production control device 300) is a sub display device by the front / back reversing means The operation control unit is configured to control the operation of 801, and the operation control unit rotates the sub display device 801 by the moving unit (sliding mechanism 820) in front of the variable display areas 42 a, 42 b, 42 c, and then rotates by the front / back reversing unit. It will be like that.

  In addition, a standby area 830 that waits the sub display device 801 at a predetermined position that is not located in front of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is provided. The standby area 830 rotates the sub display device 801 so that the front side and the back side are rotated. The movement control means (production control device 300) is configured to rotate the sub display device 801 when the sub display device 801 is moved to a position away from the standby area 830. Become.

  In addition, the sub display device 801 includes a display area (display unit 802) that displays at least the auxiliary effect on the front side, and the operation control means (effect control device 300) displays the sub display device 801 in a specific variable display area 42a, The display control means (production control device 300) is operated so as to be reversed to the front side in front of 42b and 42c, and when the sub display device 801 rotates from the back side to the front side, the specific variable display areas 42a, 42b, The identification information temporarily stopped and displayed on 42c can be temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 801.

  Next, a description will be given of an auxiliary game that suggests the number of times the second special variable winning device 39 is released in a special game state based on the special result in the special figure changing display game that is a special result for opening the second special variable winning device 39. To do. As the process related to the auxiliary game, the process shown in FIG. 59 is performed in the auxiliary game control process (step B216) in the changing process shown in FIG.

[Auxiliary game control processing]
In the auxiliary game control process, first, it is determined whether an auxiliary game is being played (step B241), and if not being an auxiliary game (step B241; No), it is determined whether the effect pattern is for an auxiliary game (step B242). ). The effect pattern for auxiliary game here is SP4 variation effect pattern 1 (for auxiliary game) shown in FIG. When it is not this auxiliary game production pattern (step B242; No), the auxiliary game control process is terminated. If the effect pattern is for the auxiliary game (step B242; Yes), it is determined whether the progress information has been set (step B243).

  The progress information is information set according to a special result from which an upper limit value of points that can be acquired in the auxiliary game and a point acquisition pattern are derived. When the progress information has been set (step B243), It is determined whether it is the execution timing of the auxiliary game (step B246). If the progress information has not been set (step B243; No), the upper limit value of the acquired points is set according to the type of jackpot (step B244), and the acquired point selection table is set according to the type of jackpot ( Step B245), it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the auxiliary game (Step B246).

  In the process of setting the acquired point upper limit value according to the type of jackpot (step B244), the upper limit value is set according to the derived special result according to the acquired point upper limit value setting table shown in FIG. The upper limit value set here is an upper limit value corresponding to the number of times the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Also, in the process of setting the acquired point selection table according to the type of jackpot (step B245), the acquired point selection table shown in FIGS. 60B to 60E is set according to the type of special result to be derived. In the auxiliary game, the acquired points are determined based on this table so that the accumulated points do not exceed the upper limit value. That is, the production control device 300 serves as an upper limit setting means for setting an upper limit of points that can be obtained in the auxiliary game in accordance with the type of special game state generated based on the result of the variable display game. Further, the production control device 300 serves as a progress restricting means for restricting the progress of the auxiliary game so that the cumulative value of points acquired in the auxiliary game does not exceed the upper limit value.

  Returning to FIG. 59, if it is the execution timing of the auxiliary game (step B246; Yes), the start of the auxiliary game is set (step B247), and it is determined whether it is during the point acquisition effect period (step B248). If it is not the execution timing of the auxiliary game (step B246; No), it is determined whether it is during the point acquisition effect period (step B248). If it is not during the point acquisition effect period (step B248; No), it is determined whether the auxiliary game period ends (step B249). If it is during the point acquisition effect period (step B248; Yes), it is determined whether there is an operation of the effect button (step B249).

  If there is no operation of the effect button (step B249; No), it is determined whether the accumulated point is the upper limit value set based on the acquired point upper limit value setting table shown in FIG. 60A (step B255). . If there is an operation of the effect button (step B249; Yes), 0 is set to the acquired point (step B250), and it is determined whether the operation of the effect button is an operation for establishing a point acquisition condition (step B251). .

  When the acquisition condition is not satisfied (step B251; No), a point acquisition effect corresponding to the set acquisition point is set (step B254). In this case, an effect that the points could not be acquired is set. If the acquisition condition is satisfied (step B251; Yes), the acquisition point is selected and set from the acquisition point selection table (step B252), and the selected acquisition point is added to the accumulated points (step B253). .

  Thereafter, a point acquisition effect corresponding to the set acquisition point is set (step B254). In this case, an effect that the acquired acquisition point selected from the acquisition point selection table is acquired is set, and an effect of adding the acquired points to the accumulated point display area 41g (see FIG. 61) for displaying the accumulated points is provided. Is set. This accumulated point suggests the number of times the second special variable winning device 39 is released in the special game state later. That is, the production control device 300 serves as cumulative point notification means capable of reporting the accumulated value of points acquired by operating the operation unit (production button 25) in the auxiliary game. In addition, the effect control device 300 serves as an opening suggestion unit that suggests conversion of the variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) to the open state for the number of times corresponding to the cumulative point notified by the cumulative point notification unit.

  Then, it is determined whether the accumulated point is the upper limit value set based on the acquired point upper limit value setting table shown in FIG. 60 (a) (step B255). Is set (step B258). Moreover, when it is not an upper limit (step B255; No), it is determined whether the point acquisition effect period was complete | finished (step B256). If the point acquisition effect period has not ended (step B256; No), the auxiliary game control process ends. When the point acquisition effect period ends (step B256; Yes), a point addition effect corresponding to the cumulative point subtracted from the upper limit value is set (step B257), and the point acquisition period end effect is set (step B258). ). That is, if the production control device 300 does not reach the upper limit value and the point acquisition period of the auxiliary game ends, the production control device 300 performs an additional production (addition production) that produces the point that becomes the difference. Make a means. The addition effect set here is performed before the start of the special game state or during the special game state. This execution timing is selected depending on the type of special result, the accumulated point value, and the like.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game period ends (step B259). If the auxiliary game period ends (step B259; Yes), the end of the auxiliary game is set (step B260), and the auxiliary game control process ends. If not finished (step B259; No), the auxiliary game control process is finished. In this case, it is determined in the next auxiliary game control process that the auxiliary game is being performed (step B241; Yes), and the processes after step B238 are performed. That is, the auxiliary control device 300 is capable of executing an auxiliary game execution means capable of executing an auxiliary game capable of acquiring points in accordance with the operation of the operation unit (the effect button 25) during the execution of the variable display game having a special result. Eggplant.

  61 to 64 show an example of the auxiliary game. Here, an auxiliary game in a special figure variable display game that shows a special result (probability 9R big hit) in which the second special variable winning device 39 (upper AT) is released 27 times is shown. In the special figure variation display game in which the SP4 variation effect pattern 1 (for the auxiliary game) is selected as the effect variation pattern, a predetermined auxiliary game execution timing from the state where the variation display is performed as shown in FIG. Then, the display is switched as shown in FIG. 61 (b), and the auxiliary game is started as shown in FIG. 61 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 61 (c), the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c are reduced and displayed when the auxiliary game is started. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as a reduced display means that can reduce and display the variable display of the identification information during execution of the auxiliary game. Further, it is suggested that a special mode (here, so-called full-rotation reach) is performed in a state where the identification information has a special result (here, “135” and “246”), which is a big hit. As shown here, the special mode displays a specific type of special result in addition to the mode (so-called full rotation reach) in which a plurality of identification information forms a plurality of types of special results. Anything may be used as long as it suggests that a special result will be obtained, such as a mode of variably displaying so as to sway in the state of being performed. By displaying the special mode in this manner, the player can be made aware that the occurrence of the auxiliary game is related to the occurrence of the special game state.

  The auxiliary game here is a game in which points can be acquired by shooting down the enemy aircraft 41h. As shown in FIG. 61 (d), the enemy aircraft 41h moving in the effect display area 41e is shown in FIG. ), The player operates the production button 25 (acquisition condition establishment operation) when the center sight is matched, and the enemy aircraft 41h is shot down as shown in FIG. 61 (f). Points are awarded as shown in g). The accumulated points that are the accumulated values of the points acquired in this way are displayed in the accumulated point display area 41g.

  When the game continues as shown in FIGS. 61 (h) and 62 (a) to (c) and reaches the upper limit value (27 points in this case) according to the special result, as shown in FIG. 62 (c). As shown in FIG. 62 (d), the auxiliary game ends, and the accumulated points are displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (e). This accumulated point suggests the number of times the second special variable prize-winning device 39 is released in the later special gaming state, and suggests that at least 27 times are released.

  Thereafter, the fluctuation display speed of the identification information gradually slows as shown in FIG. 62 (f), the result mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (g), the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and FIG. As shown in h), the special gaming state is started. In the special game state here, the round game is performed 9 rounds, and the second special variable winning device 39 (upper AT) is released 27 times.

  FIG. 63 shows an example in which points could not be acquired up to the upper limit value during a predetermined auxiliary game period. 63 (a) to 63 (c), the auxiliary game is played, but the acquired points do not reach the upper limit value (27 points in this case), and the auxiliary game period ends as shown in FIG. 63 (d). In such a case, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the auxiliary game ends at the current acquisition point. Thereafter, the fluctuation display speed of the identification information gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and when the result mode is displayed as shown in FIG. An addition effect (additional effect) to be added is performed. That is, the addition effect is performed before the start of the special game state. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the special game state is started. Note that the shortage points are added before the start of the special game state, but may be added during the special game state.

  FIG. 64 also shows an example in which points could not be acquired up to the upper limit value during a predetermined auxiliary game period. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), in this case as well, the acquired points do not reach the upper limit value (27 points in this case), and the auxiliary game ends at the current acquired points. However, the acquired points in this case are 18 points that suggest 6 rounds, which is the number of rounds in the special results ranked lower than 9 rounds, which is the number of rounds corresponding to the current special results.

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 64 (c), the special result also corresponds to the big round of 6 rounds, and as shown in FIGS. 64 (d) and 64 (e), in the special game state. The production mode also corresponds to a big hit of 6 rounds. That is, the addition effect (additional effect) is not performed before the start of the special game state. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (f), when the 18th release corresponding to the number of releases suggested in the auxiliary game is completed, the shortage points are added as shown in FIG. 64 (g). As shown in 64 (h), the special game state is continued. That is, an addition effect (additional effect) is performed during the special game state. In this way, the effect of the addition effect is improved by performing the addition effect at the timing of smelling the end of the special gaming state.

  In the example of FIG. 64, the addition effect (additional effect) is executed during the special game state. However, in this example, the addition effect can be performed before the start of the special game state. If the point is a value that suggests the number of rounds in a special result that ranks lower than the number of rounds corresponding to the special result to be derived, the probability that the special gaming state is higher than before the start of the special gaming state You may make it run with. In addition, when the addition effect is executed during the special gaming state, the addition effect is executed at the end of the release corresponding to the accumulated point (here, the 18th release), but before the end of the release corresponding to the accumulated point. An addition effect may be executed. Further, instead of adding all the deficiencies in one addition effect, it may be added in several times so that the rank gradually increases. In this way, by associating the point acquisition state with the point upper limit value of a special game state of a different type and giving a bias to the timing of occurrence of the addition effect, the special game state is given a sense of uplifting and is effectively interesting. Can be improved.

  By performing the auxiliary game as described above, the type of special gaming state (number of times the second special variable winning device 39 is opened) is suggested by the points acquired in the auxiliary game, so the player's expectation for the occurrence of the auxiliary game A feeling can be improved. It is also possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the auxiliary game. Further, since the conversion of the number of times corresponding to the notified accumulated points to the open state of the second special variation winning device 39 is suggested, the player actively operates the effect button 25. In addition, the player can feel that the addition effect has been obtained, and the player can be relieved by changing the timing of the addition effect.

  In addition, although the number of times of opening of the second special variable winning device 39 is suggested in the auxiliary game, the number of times of opening of the first special variable winning device 38 may be suggested. Further, the auxiliary game may have any content as long as the result suggests the number of times of opening. Furthermore, the auxiliary game may be executed even when a special result is not obtained. In this case, for example, an effect is made such that the accumulated points become 0 points. The operation unit may be anything as long as it can accept the player's operation. In addition to the button such as the effect button 25, the operation unit can detect the movement of the player's hand in the predetermined space. A sensor or the like may be used.

  Based on the above, the display device (see Fig. 1 display) based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (first special figure 1 start winning port 36, second special Fig. 1 start winning port 641, ordinary variable winning device 37). 51, the special figure 2 display 52, the main display device 41, and the sub display device 801) execute a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner. In a gaming machine that generates one of a plurality of special game states with different game values given to a player, an operation unit (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and a variable display game that results in a special result The auxiliary game execution means (production control device 300) capable of executing an auxiliary game capable of acquiring points according to the operation of the operation unit during the execution of the game, and the special game state generated based on the result of the variable display game type Accordingly, an upper limit value setting means (production control device 300) for setting an upper limit value of points that can be acquired in the auxiliary game, and the progress of the auxiliary game so that the accumulated value of points acquired in the auxiliary game does not exceed the upper limit value. Progress regulating means for regulating (production control device 300), and cumulative point reporting means (production control device 300) capable of reporting the accumulated value of points acquired by operating the operation unit in the auxiliary game. It will be.

  The plurality of types of special game states differ in the number of times of opening the variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) from the closed state to the open state, and the upper limit setting means is the variable winning device in the special gaming state. The number of points corresponding to the number of times of opening is set to the upper limit value.

  Also, an opening suggestion means (effect control) that suggests conversion of the variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) to the open state for the number of times corresponding to the accumulated points notified by the cumulative point notifying device (effect control device 300). Apparatus 300), and additional effect means (effect control device 300) for performing an additional effect that produces the point that becomes the difference when the point acquisition period of the auxiliary game ends without the accumulated points reaching the upper limit value. The additional effect means performs the additional effect before the special game state starts or during the special game state.

  Further, the additional effect means (the effect control device 300) indicates that the accumulated points that are notified at the end of the auxiliary game are the number of times the variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is released more than the special game state to be generated. If there is a match with the upper limit of the accumulated points corresponding to the special gaming state with a small number, the additional effect is executed during the special gaming state or with a higher probability during the special gaming state than before the start of the special gaming state. It will be done.

  Further, the additional effect means (effect control device 300) is a variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) for the number of times corresponding to the accumulated points informed of the additional effect in the special game state at the end of the auxiliary game. This is executed at the timing when the conversion of the open state is completed.

  In addition, a reduction display means (production control device 300) capable of reducing the variation display of the identification information during execution of the auxiliary game is provided, and the reduction display means suggests that the variation display game has a special result. This means that the identification information reduced and displayed in a special manner is variably displayed.

  Next, prior to the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the stored special figure start memory, a prior effect (indicating and informing the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure start memory and the contents of the production) The prefetching effect) will be described. In this pre-production, the special figure based on the special figure start memory generated based on the first special figure 1 start prize opening 36, the second special figure 1 start prize opening 641 and the normal variable prize winning device 37 forming the start prize area. The effect which suggests and alert | reports the result, effect content, etc. of a variable display game is performed. Further, in the pre-production about the special figure start memory generated based on the winning in the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641, an effect related to the operation of the swing effect member 776 of the winning ball production device 770 is also performed. ing.

[Preliminary judgment command reception processing]
FIG. 65 shows a prior determination command reception process (step B49) in the 1st scene control process (see FIG. 40). In this prior determination command reception process, first, it is determined whether a prior determination command (special symbol type / symbol information command and fluctuation pattern random number command) has been received (step B271).

  If the advance determination command has not been received (step B271; No), the advance (prefetch) effect execution process (step B284) for controlling the execution of the advance effect is performed, and the advance determination command reception process ends. When a prior determination command is received (step B271; Yes), the content of the prior determination command is saved in the corresponding hold (start) storage area (step B272), and the symbol information command is checked (step B273). , It is determined whether the symbol is a missed symbol (step B274).

  If the symbol is a loss symbol (step B274; Yes), that is, if the result is loss, a gaming state flag is acquired (step B275), and the current reserved memory number is acquired (step B276). Further, the deviation variation selection table corresponding to the game state flag and the number of reserved memories is set (step B277), and the variation pattern random number command is checked (step B279). On the other hand, if the symbol is not a missing symbol (step B274; No), that is, if the result is a big hit, the big hit big change selection table is set (step B278) and the fluctuation pattern random number command is checked (step B279).

  Then, a 2-byte distribution process is performed (step B280), information on the reach system obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired (step B281), and the acquired reach system information is saved in the target hold (start) storage area (step S281). B282). Thereafter, a prior (pre-reading) effect setting process (step B283) for setting a pre-effect is performed, a prior (pre-reading) effect execution process (step B284) for controlling the execution of the pre-effect is performed, and a prior determination command receiving process is performed. finish.

[Advance (prefetching) production setting processing]
FIG. 66 shows a prior (prefetch) effect setting process (step B283) in the prior determination command reception process. In this advance (prefetch) effect setting process, first, it is checked which start opening corresponds to the advance determination command (step B291), and corresponds to special 1 start opening B (second special figure 1 start winning opening 641). It is determined whether to do (step B292). If it corresponds to the special start port B (step B292; Yes), it is checked whether a condition for executing the special hold notice is satisfied (step B293), and the execution condition is satisfied. (Step B294).

  The conditions for executing this special hold advance notice are normal fluctuations during the reach state, during pseudo continuous fluctuation, during continuous notice advance, not during the special hold notice related to the operation of the swing effect member 776. It is that. If this execution condition is not satisfied (step B294; No), the prior (prefetch) effect setting process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production contents from being overlapped and making the production content difficult to understand.

  If the execution condition is satisfied (step B294; Yes), the special hold notice mode is determined with reference to the special hold notice form sorting table shown in FIG. 68 based on the symbol information and reach system information (step B294). B295), a measurement timer relating to the addition of the effect to the hold display 47 is set (step B296). The measurement timer is for measuring the time from the detection of the game ball by the start port 3 switch 644 to the detection of the game ball by the passage detection sensor 774a, and thereby the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path 772 (Time) is detected. Since the swing width of the swing effect member 776 depends on the flow speed, the effect is enhanced by adding an effect to the hold display 47 according to the magnitude of the flow speed. Thereafter, the execution information of the special hold advance notice is saved in the corresponding hold (start) storage area (step B297), and the advance (prefetch) effect setting process is ended. Thereby, information related to the execution of the special hold notice that informs and suggests the prior determination information in association with the operation of the swing effect member 776 is set.

  On the other hand, if the pre-determination command does not correspond to the special 1 start port B (step B292; No), does the pre-determination command correspond to the special 1 start port A (first special figure 1 start winning port 36)? Is determined (step B298). If it corresponds to the special start port A (step B298; Yes), it is checked whether the condition for executing the continuous notice is satisfied (step B299), and whether the execution condition is satisfied. Is determined (step B300).

  The condition for executing this continuous notice is that the change effect pattern of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory corresponding to the pre-judgment command is SP2-4 reach, and the continuous notice or special hold notice There is a special figure start memory for executing the special figure variation display game prior to the special figure start memory corresponding to the received prior determination command, not being executed.

  When this execution condition is satisfied (step B300; Yes), the continuous notice mode is determined based on the symbol information and the reach system information (step B301), and the number of continuous notices is determined from the current start memory number (step B301). B302). Note that there are two types of notice modes for continuous notice, one for operating the sub display device 801 and one for not operating the sub display apparatus 801. For example, the continuous notice for operating the sub display apparatus 801 is a sub display as shown in FIG. 55 to FIG. It can be selected on the condition that the effect for operating the device 801 is not executed in the special figure variation display game that is the execution target of the continuous notice. In addition, the number of the first special figure start memories to be consumed before the execution of the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory to be subjected to the continuous notice is set as the number of continuous notices.

  Thereafter, the execution information of the continuous notice is saved in the corresponding holding (starting) storage area (step B303), and the advance (prefetching) effect setting process is ended. Thus, for a specific start memory, by performing an effect in a plurality of consecutive special figure fluctuation display games over the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory, the preliminary determination information about the start memory is notified and suggested. Information related to the execution of continuous notice is set.

  Further, when the execution condition is not satisfied (step B300) and when the pre-determination command corresponds to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning apparatus 37) instead of corresponding to the special starting opening A ( Step B298; No) determines the normal hold notice mode based on the symbol information and the reach system information with reference to the normal hold notice mode distribution table shown in FIG. 69 (step B304), and corresponds to the execution information of the normal hold notice. To the reserved storage area to be saved (step B305). Thereby, information regarding the execution of the normal hold notice that informs and suggests the advance determination information by changing the display mode of the hold display 47 or the like is set.

  FIG. 67 shows the contents of the holding (starting) storage area of the production control device 300. In this holding (starting) storage area, a special figure 1 holding (starting) storage area for storing information relating to the special figure 1 starting storage, and a special figure 2 holding (starting) storage area for storing information relating to the special figure 2 starting storage. And are set. The special figure 1 hold (start) storage area and the special figure 2 hold (start) storage area each have a storage area 0 in which a hold number information storage area for storing the hold number is set, and each special figure start storage. Storage areas 1 to 4 for storing information are set.

  Information in each special figure start memory is stored in the storage areas 1 to 4 according to the digestion order, and the information is stored in the order of the storage areas 1, 2, 3, and 4 in order from the earliest digestion order. With the execution of the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory, the information in the corresponding storage area 1 is cleared and the information in the storage areas 2 to 4 is sequentially raised and stored. Each of the storage areas 1 to 4 includes a pre-determination command area for storing information on the pre-determination command (symbol information, fluctuation pattern random number 1 information), information set based on the pre-determination command, etc. (reach system information, pre-production Pre-judgment information area is set to store (execution information, special hold notice, continuous notice, execution information of normal hold notice, etc.), and refer to this information when executing the special figure display game Set the aspect.

  FIG. 68 shows a special reservation notice mode distribution table referred to in the process (step B295) for determining the special reservation notice mode based on the symbol information and the reach system information. As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the special hold notice here is an initial display of a hold display 47 that forms a stored display image displayed on the main display device 41 in accordance with the swing operation of the swing effect member 776. The display is moved from the area 48, and the result and the variation pattern are notified and suggested by the effect that the hold display 47 passes the goal 49 and the effect that changes the display mode.

  In the special reservation advance notice allocation table, notice modes and ratios (notification ratios) that can be selected according to symbol information and reach system information are set. The information shown in the notice mode column is the color of the hold display 47 in the initial display area 48 (white, blue, yellow or red) → whether the goal 49 has passed (goal or missed) → the hold after the goal 49 has passed The color of the display 47 (white, blue, yellow, red, or rainbow) is shown. Note that the color of the hold display 47 indicates the degree of expectation of the big hit, white is the lowest, and the degree of expectation of the big hit increases in the order of blue, yellow, red, and rainbow.

  For example, when the symbol information is out of reach and the reach system information is out of reach, the display color in the initial display area 48 of the hold display 47 is white with a probability of 49% and does not pass the goal 49 (out of place). A notice mode in which the subsequent display color remains white is selected. Further, a notice mode is selected in which the display color in the initial display area 48 of the hold display 47 is white with a probability of 49%, passes through the goal 49 (goal), and the display color after passing the goal 49 remains white. The Further, a notice mode is selected in which the display color in the initial display area 48 of the hold display 47 is white with a probability of 1%, passes the goal 49 (goal), and the display color after passing the goal 49 is blue. Further, a notice mode is selected in which the display color in the initial display area 48 of the hold display 47 is blue with a probability of 1%, passes the goal 49 (goal), and the display color after passing the goal 49 is blue. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as a display mode changing unit that can change the display mode of the stored display image (the hold display 47) based on the determination result by the prior determination unit (game control device 100).

  FIG. 69 shows a normal hold notice mode distribution table referred to in the process (step B304) for determining the normal hold notice mode based on the symbol information and the reach system information. Here, the normal hold notice informs and suggests the result and the variation pattern by the display color of the hold display 47 in the storage display area 43 as shown in FIG. For example, when the symbol information is out of reach and the reach system information is not reach, white is selected with a probability of 97% and blue is selected with a probability of 3%.

[Advance (prefetching) production execution processing]
FIG. 70 shows a prior (prefetching) effect execution process (step B284) in the prior determination command reception process. In this advance (pre-reading) effect execution process, first, it is checked whether or not there is execution information of special hold notice in the hold (start) storage area (step B311). If there is execution information for the special hold advance notice (step B312; Yes), the special hold advance notice execution process (step B317) is performed, and the advance (prefetch) effect execution process is terminated. As a result, execution of the special hold notice is set. If there is no execution information for special hold notice (step B312; No), it is checked whether there is execution information for continuous notice in the hold (start) storage area (step B313).

  If there is execution information for the continuous notice (step B314; Yes), the continuous notice execution process (step B318) is performed, and the advance (prefetch) effect execution process is terminated. As a result, execution of continuous notice is set. When there is no continuous advance notice execution information (step B314; No), it is checked whether there is normal hold advance notice execution information in the hold (start) storage area (step B315).

  When there is execution information for the normal hold notice (step B316; Yes), the normal hold notice execution process (step B319) is performed, and the advance (prefetch) effect execution process is terminated. As a result, execution of the normal hold notice is set. Further, when there is no execution information of the normal hold notice (step B316; No), the advance (prefetch) effect execution process is ended.

[Special hold notice execution process]
FIG. 71 shows the special hold notice execution process (step B317) in the advance (prefetch) effect execution process. In this special hold advance notice execution process, it is first determined whether or not the initial display has been completed (step B321). In the initial display, the hold display 47 corresponding to the special figure start memory generated based on the winning in the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 corresponds to the position of the swing effect member 776 in the main display device 41. This is the state displayed in the initial display area 48.

  When the initial display has not been completed (step B321; No), a hold display corresponding to the execution information is displayed in the initial display area 48 (step B322), and it is checked whether the winning ball has passed through the passage detection sensor 774a (step B323). ). If the initial display has been completed (step B321; Yes), it is checked whether the winning ball has passed through the passage detection sensor 774a (step B323). If the winning ball has not passed through the passage detection sensor 774a (step B324; No), the special hold notice execution process is terminated. If the winning ball passes through the passage detection sensor 774a (step B324; Yes), the necessity of effect addition is determined based on the execution information and the value of the measurement timer (step B325).

  As shown in FIG. 72, it is necessary to add an effect as to whether or not the value of the measurement timer is less than 1 second, and the display color after passing the goal is more expected than the display color in the initial display area 48. It is determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the display color is to be increased (promoted). For example, when the value of the measurement timer is less than 1 second and the display color in the initial display area 48 and the display color after passing the goal 49 are the same (no promotion), the addition of the effect is determined with a probability of 50%. Is done. Note that when the value of the measurement timer is less than 1 second, the flow speed is higher and the swing width of the swing effect member 776 is larger than when the measurement timer value is 1 second or longer, so that the probability of adding an effect is increased. ing. Further, the probability of adding an effect is higher when there is a promotion than when there is no promotion.

  Returning to FIG. 71, when the effect is added (step B326; Yes), the effect is added to the hold display displayed in the initial display area 48 (step B327), and execution of the mode change effect of the hold display is set. (Step B328). The mode change effect of the hold display 47 is an effect including a movement display of the hold display 47, a change in display color, an effect display, and an disappearance. If no effect is added (step B326; No), execution of the mode change effect of the hold display 47 is set (step B328). Thereafter, the measurement timer is cleared to clear the execution information of the special hold notice (step B329), and the special hold notice execution process is terminated.

  That is, the production control device 300 operates the movable member (swinging production member 776) on the display unit 41a based on the inflow ball detected by the ball detection unit (starting port 3 switch 644, passage detection sensor 774a). A specific effect execution means capable of executing a related specific effect (special hold notice effect) is provided. Further, based on the fact that the effect control device 300 has detected a winning ball that has won a winning opening in the ball detecting unit (starting port 3 switch 644, passage detection sensor 774a), a predetermined image is displayed as a movable member (swinging effect member). 776) image display means capable of being displayed at a position corresponding to the above. In addition, the movement display means that enables the effect control apparatus 300 to move and display a predetermined image displayed by the image display means (effect control apparatus 300) in accordance with the operation of the movable member (swing effect member 776). Eggplant.

  73 and 74 show an example of the special reservation notice. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when a game ball flows into the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 and is detected by the start opening 3 switch 644, a start memory pre-determination based on the winning is performed. Here, execution of the special hold advance notice is selected, and the production control device 300 determines the special hold advance notice form based on the result of the prior determination, and performs the hold display in the initial display area 48 according to this. Here, a white hold display 47 is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the game ball passes through the passage detection sensor 774a and collides with the ball receiving portion 776a of the swing effect member 776, the lower portion of the swing effect member 776 rotates to the right. . In the effect control device 300, the game ball passes through the passage detection sensor 774a, and the necessity of adding the effect is determined based on the value of the measurement timer. Here, adding an effect is not selected. Furthermore, execution of a mode change effect for moving the hold display 47 from the initial display area 48 to the right as the lower part of the swing effect member 776 rotates to the right is set. Thereby, the effect display is performed as if the hold display 47 is kicked rightward by the swing effect member 776 simulating the shape of the foot.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (c), in the area on the right side of the main display device 41, a display simulating a basketball goal is made as the goal 49, and the hold display 47 is moved and displayed toward the goal 49. When the passage of the goal 49 is selected, as shown in FIGS. 73 (c) and 73 (d), the hold display 47 is displayed to pass the goal 49. At this time, the sub display device 801 displays “CHANCE” indicating that the goal 49 is passed. Furthermore, when the change of the color of the hold display 47 after passing the goal 49 is set, the color of the hold display 47 is changed as shown in FIG. 73 (d). Here, it changes to yellow after passing the goal 49. At this time, the sub-display device 801 displays “CHANGE” indicating that the color of the hold display 47 has changed.

  The hold display 47 that has passed the goal 49 is displayed so as to flow into the storage display area 43 displayed at the lower right of the main display device 41. The storage display area 43 is a horizontally long area inclined to the left and the hold display 47 flows from the right end of the storage display area 43 and is displayed to the left.

  When the passage of the goal 49 is not selected, the hold display 47 is displayed so as to flow into the storage display area 43 without passing the goal 49 as shown in FIGS. 73 (e) and 73 (f). . At this time, the sub display device 801 displays “bad” indicating that the goal 49 is not passed. Further, here, the color change of the hold display 47 is not set, and the color of the hold display 47 remains white as shown in FIG. 73 (f). At this time, the sub display device 801 displays “Chin ...” indicating that the display color has not changed.

  FIG. 74 shows a case where an effect 47a is added. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the game ball flows into the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641, is detected by the start opening 3 switch 644, and the special figure start memory based on the winning is determined in advance. The execution of the special hold notice is selected, and a blue hold display 47 is displayed in the initial display area 48 here. Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the game ball passes through the passage detection sensor 744a and collides with the ball receiving portion 776a of the swing effect member 776 to rotate the lower portion of the swing effect member 776 to the right. ing.

  Here, the addition of an effect is selected based on the value of the measurement timer, and the effect 47 a is displayed so as to surround the hold display 47. While the effect 47a is displayed, the hold display 47 is moved from the initial display area 48 to the right as the lower portion of the swing effect member 776 rotates to the right.

  When the passage of the goal 49 and the display color change are selected, as shown in FIGS. 74 (c) and 74 (d), the hold display 47 is displayed to pass the goal 49 and after the goal 49 has passed. The color of the hold display 47 changes. When the goal 49 is passed, the hold display 47 is displayed so as to flow into the storage display area 43 while the effect 47a is displayed. Further, when the passage of the goal 49 is not selected, the hold display 47 is displayed so as to flow into the storage display area 43 without passing the goal 49 as shown in FIGS. 74 (e) and 74 (f). . In this case, the display of the effect 47a ends when the goal 49 is not passed.

  In this way, by performing the special reservation advance notice in relation to the operation of the swing effect member 776, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the swing effect member 776 during the operation, The production effect can be improved effectively.

  A hold display (character or icon) or the like for notifying that the display color of the hold display 47 is likely to change may be performed. In this case, the display color in the initial display area 48 may be white only. In addition, although the display color is changed only to a display color with a high degree of expectation for jackpots, a demote change that changes to a display color with a low degree of expectation for jackpots may be possible. In this case, it is preferable that the display color is demoted and changed when the goal 49 is not passed.

  In addition, the display color is changed with the passage of the goal 49 as an opportunity, but the display color may be changed at other timings or may be changed in a plurality of stages. For example, the display mode such as a display color change may be changed when the swing effect member 776 is swinging. Further, a light emitting part may be provided behind or in the vicinity of the swing effect member to suggest that the display mode of the hold display 47 changes depending on the light emission color of the light emitting part, or the light emission of the light emitting part may be used as an effect. good.

  Further, although the start port 3 switch 644 is provided in the start port forming member 640 that forms the second special figure 1 start winning port 641, it may be provided in the flow path 772 in the winning ball effect device 770. Further, the start port 3 switch 644 may be provided at the position of the passage detection sensor 774a without providing the passage detection sensor 774a. Further, a sensor for measuring (detecting) the flow velocity of the winning ball may be provided in the flow path 772, and the presence / absence of an effect may be determined based on the flow velocity measured (detected) by this sensor.

  In addition, the special hold advance notice is performed in relation to the operation of the swing effect member 776, but the special hold advance notice may be simply an image effect that informs that there has been a start prize. In addition, the special reservation notice is given for the winning at the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641, but the special hold notice may be made for the winning at other start winning openings. Although the first start memory is generated by winning the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641, the second start memory may be generated by using the start winning opening as the second special figure 2 start winning opening. .

  In addition, the swing effect member 776 is swung by the game ball won in the second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 and the effect display is performed in accordance with this, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball that has flowed into the ball inflow portion into which the game ball flowing down can swing the swing effect member 776, and the effect display can be performed accordingly. That is, the ball inflow portion may be another winning opening, or may be an inflow portion other than the winning opening such as the warp device 610. In addition, although the effect is provided by swinging, a movable member that provides an effect by other operations may be used as long as it is a movable member that can be operated in front of the display unit 41a when the inflowing ball collides. good.

  From the above, the game board 30 in which the game area 32 is formed on the surface, the display device (main display device 41) disposed corresponding to the game board 30 so that the display unit 41a can be visually recognized, In a gaming machine equipped with a sphere, a ball inflow portion (second special drawing 1 start winning port 641) into which a game ball flowing down the game area 32 can flow, and a ball flow path portion for flowing down the inflow sphere flowing into the ball inflow portion (Flow path 772), a movable member (oscillation effect member 776) operable in front of the display unit 41a when the inflowing sphere collides, and a sphere detection unit capable of detecting the inflowing sphere before colliding with the movable member (Starting port 3 switch 644, passage detection sensor 774a) and specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect related to the operation of the movable member on the display unit 41a based on the inflow ball detected by the ball detection unit (Production control device 300) The Rukoto.

  Here, the display device arranged corresponding to the game board is arranged at a place other than the game board such as a frame for attaching the game board, in addition to the display apparatus arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, It also includes a display device that faces a predetermined position of the game board.

  Further, the movable member (swinging effect member 776) swings in the direction along the display unit 41a when the inflowing ball collides.

  The ball inflow portion (second special figure 1 start winning opening 641) is a winning opening that gives a player a game value by winning a game ball, and the specific effect executing means (the effect control device 300) detects a ball. The predetermined image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable member (swinging effect member 776) based on the detection of the winning ball that has won the winning opening by the unit (start port 3 switch 644, passage detection sensor 774a). An image display means (effect control device 300) capable of moving, a movement display means (effect control device 300) capable of moving and displaying a predetermined image displayed by the image display means in accordance with the operation of the movable member, It will be equipped with.

  The winning opening (second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641) is a starting winning opening for causing a display device (main display device 41) to execute a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information by winning a game ball. A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of extracting a random number based on a winning of a game ball at the start winning opening and storing it as a start memory for executing a variable display game is provided on the display unit 41a. The storage display area 43 for notifying the start memory stored in the start storage means is set, and the image display means (production control device 300) is based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening as a predetermined image. The stored display image (holding display 47) corresponding to the stored start memory is displayed, and the moving display means (production control device 300) displays the stored display image displayed by the image display means in the storage display area. The fact that possible to move the display.

  The winning opening (second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641) is a starting winning opening for causing a display device (main display device 41) to execute a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information by winning a game ball. A starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of extracting a random number based on a winning of a game ball at the starting winning opening and storing it as a starting memory for executing a variable display game, and starting in the starting storage means Pre-determining means (game control device 100) capable of pre-determining random numbers stored as memory before execution of the variable display game corresponding to the start-up memory, and image display means (effect control device 300) Displays a stored display image (holding display 47) corresponding to the start memory stored based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening as a predetermined image, and moves display means (effect control device 300) Based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, and that it is to change the moving display mode storage display image. Here, changing the movement display mode includes adding an effect to the stored display image, changing the movement path, and the like.

  In addition, display mode changing means (effect control device 300) capable of changing the display mode of the stored display image (holding display 47) based on the determination result by the prior determination unit (game control device 100) is provided. The mode change means changes the display mode of the stored display image during or as the result of the movement display by the movement display means (effect control device 300). Therefore, the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

[Continuous notice execution process]
FIG. 75 shows a continuous notice execution process (step B318) in the prior (prefetch) effect execution process. In this continuous notice execution process, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (step B341). If it is not the start timing of the variable display (step B341; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred (step B346). If it is the start timing of the variable display (step B341; Yes), a special 1 change is made. It is determined whether the game is a first special figure variation display game (step B342).

  In the case of special fluctuation (step B342; Yes), the continuous notice mode and the continuous notice action corresponding to the remaining number of notices are set (step B343), the number of consecutive notices is subtracted by 1 (step B344), and the big hit is It is determined whether it has occurred (step B346). If the change is not a special change (step B342; No), the same continuous advance notice operation as the previous special change is reset (step B345), and it is determined whether a big hit has occurred (step B346). . In the processing for setting the continuous notice operation (steps B343 and B345), in addition to the display contents on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801, the operation mode of the sub display device 801 is also set and displayed according to the setting here. Control means and operation control means control display and operation on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801.

  If the big hit has not occurred (step B346; No), the continuous notice execution process is terminated. If a big hit has occurred (step B346; Yes), the execution information of the continuous notice is cleared (step B347), and the continuous notice execution process ends. Thus, for example, when a continuous advance notice is executed for the first start memory, the second start memory is generated, and if the big hit is generated in the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory, it is continuous. The notice ends. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as a continuous effect executing means for executing a continuous effect over a plurality of variable display games based on the determination result of the prior determination means (game control device 100).

[Normal hold notice execution process]
FIG. 76 shows a normal hold advance notice execution process (step B319) in the advance (prefetch) effect execution process. In this normal hold advance notice execution process, first, the normal hold advance notice mode stored in the hold storage area is acquired (step B351), and the display mode of each hold display is set based on the normal hold advance notice mode (step B352). Then, the display position of each hold display is set according to the number of hold memories (step B353), and the normal hold notice execution process is terminated. Thereby, the pre-production by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the hold display 47 displayed in the memory display area 43 is executed.

  77 and 78 show an example of the continuous notice and the normal hold notice. In this example, the execution of the continuous notice is determined for the first start memory that is digested fourth in the state where there are four first start memories. As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 78 (a), here, the normal hold notice is executed for the first start memory subject to continuous notice, and the corresponding display displayed in the memory display area 43 is performed. The display color of the hold display 47 is changed from normal white to red.

  FIG. 77 shows an example of continuous notice in which the operation mode of the sub display device 801 is different each time in the continuous notice. In the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory having the first digestion order, the first continuous notice is performed. In this first continuous notice, a notice image 1 indicating that this is the first continuous notice is displayed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 in the standby area 830 as shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b). A special figure variation display game is played in the state of being played. Note that the preview image indicating continuous notification is an image that is not displayed on the main display device 41.

  In the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory having the second digestion order, the second continuous notice is performed. In the second continuous notice, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the sub display device 801 is displayed with the notice image 2 indicating the second continuous notice displayed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801. Is moved in front of the right fluctuation display area 42c during the fluctuation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the variable display is terminated while the sub display device 801 is placed at this position, and the identification information stopped and displayed in the right change display region 42c is displayed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801. To display.

  In the special figure change display game based on the first start memory whose third digestion order is the third, the third continuous notice is performed. In this third continuous notice, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), a notice indicating that it is the third continuous notice on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 located in front of the right variation display area 42c. The image 3 is displayed, and the sub display device 801 is moved to the front of the middle fluctuation display area 42b. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), the variable display is terminated while the sub display device 801 is placed at this position, and the identification information stopped and displayed in the middle change display area 42b is displayed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801. To display.

  In the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory that is the subject of the fourth continuous notice of digestion order, that is, in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory that is the subject of notice in this example, The fourth is done. In this fourth continuous notice, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), a notice indicating that it is the fourth continuous notice on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 located in front of the middle fluctuation display area 42b. Image 4 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (h), after reaching the reach state in which the same identification information is stopped in the left variation display area 42a and the right variation display area 42c, the sub display device 801 is rotated and the display unit 802 is once visually recognized. The sub display device 801 is rotated so that the display unit 802 can be visually recognized again in a state where the development symbol indicating that the SP reach is developed is displayed on the display unit 802. It should be noted that the rotation may be sandwiched when the sub display device 801 is moved in each successive notice. Moreover, the operation | movement which moves the sub display apparatus 801 to the position which covers the left fluctuation | variation display area 42a may be included.

  FIG. 78 shows an example of a continuous notice in which the operation mode of the sub display device 801 is the same for each successive notice. In the first continuous notice, when the special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the continuous notice is executed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 in the standby area 830. “Ikuzo-” is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 78B to 78D, the sub display device 801 moves toward the front of the right variation display area 42c and rotates so that the display unit 802 becomes invisible. As shown in (e), the display unit 802 becomes visible again in front of the right fluctuation display area 42c in a state where the preview image 1 indicating the first continuous notification is displayed on the display unit 802. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (f), the variable display is temporarily stopped while the sub display device 801 is placed at this position, and the identification information stopped and displayed in the right variable display area 42c is displayed on the display unit of the sub display device 801. Displayed in 802. At this time, the sub display device 801 may be rotated so as to swing about the shaft portion 803 to indicate that it is in a temporarily stopped state.

  Thereafter, the sub display device 801 is returned to the standby area 830 as shown in FIG. At this time, the same identification information as that displayed on the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 is stopped and displayed in the right variation display area 42c. Further, when the sub display device 801 is returned to the standby area 830, the sub display device 801 is slid without being rotated, and can be quickly returned to the standby area 830.

  Then, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a state where the sub display device 801 returns to the standby area 830 as shown in FIG. At this time, the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 displays “does it continue?” Suggesting the possibility of continuing the continuous notice in the next special figure variation display game. When the continuous notice is continued in the next special figure variation display game, the effects of FIGS. 78A to 78H are performed again. Note that the preview image displayed on the sub display device 801 is an image corresponding to the number of times of continuous notification. Further, when the continuous notice is not continued in the next special figure fluctuation display game, a normal effect is executed.

  By adopting such a continuous notice execution mode, it is possible to effectively enhance the effect of continuous production using the sub display device 801 provided separately from the main display device 41, and to enhance the fun of the game. Can be improved.

  As described above, in the gaming machine including the main display device 41 that can display the main effect accompanying the progress of the game and the sub display device 801 that can display the auxiliary effect of the main effect, the display unit of the main display device 41 Moving means (slide mechanism 820) capable of moving the sub display device 801 in front of 41a, operation control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the sub display device 801 by the moving means, and the main display device 41 and display control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the display on the sub display device 801. The display control means assists an image that is not displayed on the main display device 41 in front of the main display device 41. It can be displayed as an effect.

  Also, a random display is performed by extracting random numbers based on winning of game balls to the start winning opening (the first special figure 1 starting winning opening 36, the second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). A start storage means (game control device 100) that can be stored as a start memory for execution, and a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before the execution of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory Predetermining means (game control device 100) capable of determining, and continuous effect executing means (effect control device 300) for executing continuous effects over a plurality of variable display games based on the determination result of the prior determining means. ), And the operation control means (effect control device 300) and the display control means (effect control device 300) perform multiple effects when the continuous effect is executed by the continuous effect execution means. The fact that so as to perform an auxiliary effect with the operation of the sub-display device 801 in each of the variable display game.

  In addition, you may make it provide the light emission decoration part and display part which decorate by light emission of LED as a decoration part provided in the back surface facing the surface in which the display part 802 of the sub display device 801 was provided. Further, the sub display device 801 is a transmissive display (EL or the like), the back of the sub display device 801 is visible through the display unit 802, and the image of the display unit 802 is visible from both the front and back sides. At the same time, the image displayed on the main display device 41 may be made visible. For example, it is possible to see through the variable display and stop symbols in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c of the main display device 41, or to perform different effect display on the front and back while the sub display device 801 is rotating. good.

  In addition, when the sub display device 801 operates, decoration may be performed by rotating the effect rotating body 753. Further, the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory is executed in preference to the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory. However, the special figure variation display game is executed in the order in which the start memories are generated. In addition, both the first start memory and the second start memory may be set as the target of the continuous notice effect.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the arrangement mode of the sub display device 801.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the sub display device 801 in this modified example is movable along the vertical direction by the slide mechanism 820, and is centered on the shaft portion 803 along the horizontal direction by the rotation drive unit 810. It can be rotated as. FIG. 79 shows an example of continuous notice using such a sub display device 801. Note that at least a part of the display portion 802 may be always visible without rotating the sub display device 801. In this case, if a variation display area of the fourth symbol is set in an area that is always visible in the display unit 802 and the fourth symbol is variably displayed in the variation display region, is the variation display game being executed? It becomes easy for the player to understand whether or not.

  In this example, execution of continuous notice is determined for the first start memory that is digested second in the state where there are two first start memories. Note that, as shown in FIG. 79A, here, the normal hold notice is executed for the first start memory that is the subject of the continuous notice, and the display color of the corresponding hold display 47 displayed in the storage display area 43 is displayed. Has been changed from normal white to red.

  In the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory having the first digestion order, the first continuous notice is performed. In this first continuous notice, the sub display device 801 in the standby area 830 as shown in FIG. 79 (a) descends to a position overlapping the front of the main display device 41 as shown in FIG. 79 (b), A notice image 1 indicating that this is the first continuous notice is displayed on the display unit 802. Then, the sub display device returns to the standby area 830 along with the end of the special figure variation display game, and the display unit 802 of the sub display device 801 indicates the possibility of continuing the continuous notice in the next special figure variation display game. “Do you want to continue?” Is displayed.

  Thereafter, the next special figure fluctuation display game is started as shown in FIG. 79 (d), and the sub display device 801 in the waiting area 830 in the special figure fluctuation display game as shown in FIG. 79 (e) is the main display. The display image 802 is lowered to a position overlapping the front of the device 41, and a notice image 2 indicating that it is the second continuous notice is displayed on the display unit 802. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (f), the sub-display device 801 returns to the standby area 830 after the same identification information is stopped in the left fluctuation display area 42 a and the right fluctuation display area 42 c, and the display unit 802 Is displayed as “Development!” Indicating that it will develop into SP reach. It should be noted that the rotation may be sandwiched when the sub display device 801 is moved in each successive notice. Also according to the arrangement mode of the sub display device 801, similar to the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the effect of the display by the sub display device 801 provided separately from the main display device 41 can be improved efficiently, and the game can be enjoyed. Can be increased. In addition, when returning the sub display device 801 to the standby area 830, it is preferable that the sub display device 801 is slid without rotating and can be quickly returned to the standby area 830.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the arrangement mode of the sub display device 801.

  In this modified example, the distance between the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801 is shortened to give a sense of unity between the two, thereby improving the effect. Further, the space in the game board 30 can be used effectively by narrowing the front-rear width for disposing the sub display device 801.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the sub display device 801 located in the standby area 830 has a front and rear position of the shaft portion 803 that is longer than the length (rotation radius) from the shaft portion 803 to the side end of the sub display device 801. The distance between the rear wall 830a of the standby area 830 and the distance between the front and rear positions of the shaft portion 803 and the front wall 830b of the standby area 830 are shorter, and the front and back of the sub display device 801 cannot be reversed in the standby area 830. It is in a state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80B, the front wall 830b of the standby area 830 does not interfere with the rotation of the sub display device 801 by sliding from the standby area 830, but the rear wall 830a of the standby area 830 And the display unit 41a of the main display device 41 are on the same plane, and the front and back of the sub display device 801 cannot be reversed even when the display unit 41a is slid forward from the standby area 830 along the left-right direction.

  Therefore, when reversing the front and back of the sub display device 801, the shaft portion 803 is rotated while being moved forward as shown in FIG. 80 (c), and then the shaft portion as shown in FIG. 80 (d). 803 is returned to the original position. Further, in the case of further rotation, as shown in FIGS. 80E to 80H, the shaft portion 803 is rotated while being moved forward. In order to perform such an operation, a back-and-forth movement mechanism that moves the slide mechanism 820 or the rotation drive unit 810 in the front-rear direction is provided, and the back-and-forth movement is performed according to the rotation of the sub display device 801. Alternatively, the effect control device 300 controls the back and forth movement according to the rotation of the sub display device 801.

  Here, the sub display device 801 is rotated clockwise as shown in FIGS. 80A to 80D, and the sub display device 801 is further rotated clockwise as shown in FIGS. 80E to 80H. The sub display device 801 may be rotated counterclockwise in FIGS. 80E to 80H. That is, the rotation direction at the time of the previous reversal and the rotation direction at the time of the subsequent reversal following the previous reversal may be reversed. In this way, the twist of the communication line connected to the sub display device 801 is reduced. Further, when the shaft portion 803 is once moved in the forward direction when the sub display device 801 is rotated, the shaft portion 803 is moved in the left-right direction at that position until returning to the standby area 830, and the shaft portion 803 is further rotated. It is also possible not to perform forward movement.

  From the above, the standby area 830 for waiting the sub display device 801 at a predetermined position that is not located in front of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is provided, and the standby area 830 rotates the sub display device 801 and turns it into the front side. The width cannot be reversed with respect to the back side, and the operation control means (effect control device 300) rotates the sub display device 801 after moving it to a rotatable position.

  Further, the sub display device 801 is moved so that the distance of the rotation axis (shaft portion 803) from the display unit 41a of the main display device 41 is closer to the rotation radius of the sub display device 801. When rotating the rotation axis, there is provided an axis moving means for moving the rotation axis so that the distance of the rotation axis from the display unit 41a of the main display device 41 is larger than the rotation radius of the sub display device 801.

  It should be noted that the variable display game being executed at the position shielded by the sub display device 801 so that the sub display device 801 moved to the front of the main display device 41 becomes visible when the front side and the back side are reversed. An image such as a notice image (expectation notification image, result suggestion image) may be displayed.

  In addition, an image (background image, effect image, etc.) displayed on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801 is composed of one piece of image data, and a specific portion of the image data is displayed on the main display device 41. The remaining part may be controlled to be displayed on the sub display device 801. In this way, the load on the effect control device 300 is lighter than when the images to be displayed on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801 are generated independently. If the performance control device 300 has high performance, images to be displayed on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801 may be generated independently.

Conventional gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines, are provided with an image display device capable of displaying a plurality of identification information and a plurality of identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (such as a game ball winning at a start winning opening). When a variable display game is executed by a rotary display device and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generally generated.
In such a gaming machine, a movable member (rotating body such as a windmill) is operated by using the weight of the game ball that has flowed down the game area, and an effect is produced by focusing attention on the operation of the movable member. There is also known one that improves the above (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081543).
By the way, in the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081543, the player's attention is only collected in the operation mode of the movable member, so that it is possible to expect an effect more than the operation of the movable member. It wasn't.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment has a gaming board 30 with a gaming area 32 formed on the surface, and a display arranged corresponding to the gaming board 30 so that the display unit 41a can be seen. A device (main display device 41), a ball inflow portion (second special figure 1 start winning port 641) through which a game ball flowing down the game area 32 can flow, and a ball inflow portion The spherical flow path portion (flow path 772) that causes the inflow sphere to flow down collides with the movable member that can be operated in front of the display section 41a (the swing effect member 776), and the movable member. Based on the detection of the inflowing sphere by the sphere detection unit (start port 3 switch 644, passage detection sensor 774a) capable of detecting the previous inflowing sphere and the sphere detection unit, the display unit 41a relates to the operation of the movable member. Specific production execution means (production control) Includes a location 300), the.

  Here, the display device arranged corresponding to the game board is arranged at a place other than the game board such as a frame for attaching the game board, in addition to the display apparatus arranged at a predetermined position of the game board, It also includes a display device that faces a predetermined position of the game board.

  Therefore, in addition to the operation of the movable member based on the inflow of the game ball to the ball inflow portion, a specific effect related to this can be performed, and the effect effect during the operation of the movable member that operates using the weight of the game ball Can be effectively improved.

  The movable member (swinging effect member 776) swings in the direction along the display unit 41a when the inflowing ball collides.

  Therefore, the movable member swings to easily attract the player's attention, and the effect of production can be enhanced. Moreover, since it moves in the direction along the display unit 41a, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the swinging motion of the movable member, and the specific effect on the display unit 41a is easily matched to the operation of the movable member.

  The ball inflow portion (second special figure 1 start winning opening 641) is a winning opening that gives a player a game value by winning a game ball, and the specific effect executing means (the effect control device 300) detects a ball. The predetermined image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable member (swinging effect member 776) based on the detection of the winning ball that has won the winning opening by the unit (start port 3 switch 644, passage detection sensor 774a). An image display means (effect control device 300) capable of moving, a movement display means (effect control device 300) capable of moving and displaying a predetermined image displayed by the image display means in accordance with the operation of the movable member, It has.

  Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to effectively recognize that the game ball has flowed into the winning opening to which the game value is given by the operation of the movable member or the specific effect.

  The winning opening (second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641) is a starting winning opening for causing a display device (main display device 41) to execute a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information by winning a game ball. A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of extracting a random number based on a winning of a game ball at the start winning opening and storing it as a start memory for executing a variable display game is provided on the display unit 41a. The storage display area 43 for notifying the start memory stored in the start storage means is set, and the image display means (production control device 300) is based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening as a predetermined image. The stored display image (holding display 44) corresponding to the stored start memory is displayed, and the moving display means (production control device 300) displays the stored display image displayed by the image display means in the storage display area. And so as to move the display.

  Therefore, the operation of the movable member and the specific effect can be effectively used for notifying the occurrence of the start memory.

  The winning opening (second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641) is a starting winning opening for causing a display device (main display device 41) to execute a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information by winning a game ball. A starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of extracting a random number based on a winning of a game ball at the starting winning opening and storing it as a starting memory for executing a variable display game, and starting in the starting storage means Pre-determining means (game control device 100) capable of pre-determining random numbers stored as memory before execution of the variable display game corresponding to the start-up memory, and image display means (effect control device 300) Displays a stored display image (holding display 44) corresponding to the start memory stored based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening as a predetermined image, and moves display means (effect control device 300) Based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, so as to change the moving display mode storage display image.

  Here, changing the movement display mode includes adding an effect to the stored display image, changing the movement path, and the like.

  Therefore, the notification of the result of the prior determination can be effectively performed by the operation of the movable member and the specific effect.

  In addition, display mode changing means (effect control device 300) capable of changing the display mode of the stored display image (holding display 44) based on the determination result by the prior determination unit (game control device 100) is provided. The mode change means changes the display mode of the stored display image during or as the result of the movement display by the movement display means (effect control device 300).

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the specific effect.

  In addition, the specific effect executing means (the effect control device 300) is configured to detect an inflowing ball by the ball detection unit (starting port 3 switch 644, passage detection sensor 774a) during execution of the specific effect (special hold notice). The specific effect based on the detection of the inflow ball is not executed.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific performance being executed from becoming difficult to understand.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a display device executes a variable display game with a plurality of identification information based on winning of a game ball in a start winning opening provided in the game area, and the variable display game In general, when a special result is obtained, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated.
In such gaming machines, game balls (game balls for which game results have been confirmed) that have been won at the prize opening and the outlet are stored and stored based on the operation of the operation unit by the player. There is also a technique in which a game ball is released into a predetermined ball rolling region to produce an effect (see, for example, JP-A-2006-239251).
By the way, in a gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-239251, a game ball that has been stored is released to the ball rolling area, and the result of the variable display game is notified in advance. The game ball released to the rolling area did not change the execution mode of the running variable display game.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the start winning area provided in the game area 32 (the first special figure 1 start winning port 36, the second special figure 1 start winning port 641, the normal variable winning device 37). Based on the winning of the game ball, the display device (Special Figure 1 Display 51, Special Figure 2 Display 52, Main Display Device 41, Sub Display Device 801) executes a variable display game with a plurality of identification information, and the change A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the displayed game has a special result, and an operation unit (production button 25) that can be operated by the player, and a game that flows down the gaming area 32 A ball entrance (second special variable prize-winning device 39) through which a ball can flow, and a ball storage unit capable of receiving and storing the game ball flowing into the ball entrance and discharging the stored game ball (Reservoir channel 742) and released from the sphere reservoir A ball effect unit (ball effect unit 750) capable of performing a ball effect on whether or not the game ball rolls and flows into a specific area (specific inflow port 767a), and an operation unit during execution of the variable display game And the ball effect execution means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the ball effect by releasing the game ball from the ball storage unit, and the game ball flows into the specific area in the ball effect. And an effect mode changing means (effect control device 300) capable of changing the effect mode of the running variable display game depending on whether or not the game has been performed.

  Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the execution mode of the running variable display game according to the rolling result of the game ball stored in the ball effect.

  The variation display game is executed by any one of a plurality of variation display patterns having different execution times, and the effect mode changing means (the effect control device 300) identifies the change display game being executed without changing the execution time. The change mode of information is changed.

  Therefore, the execution time of the variable display game is not unnecessarily extended by the execution of the ball effect, and the operation of the gaming machine is not lowered.

  In addition, when the game ball flows into the specific area (specific inflow port 767a) in the ball effect, the effect mode changing means (the effect control device 300) performs a temporary continuous effect by temporarily stopping and re-changing the identification information. Is generated.

  Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the chance that the variable display game has a special result has expanded according to the result of the ball effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the ball effect execution means (effect control device 300) can execute a ball effect multiple times in one variation display game, and the effect mode change means (effect control device 300) can specify a specific area (specification) in the ball effect. Each time a game ball flows into the inflow port 767a), a pseudo-continuous effect for temporarily stopping and re-changing the identification information is generated.

  Accordingly, the player can be motivated to operate the operation unit so that the game ball flows into the specific area in the ball effect, and the interest of the ball effect is improved.

  In addition, it includes execution number determination means (effect control device 300) capable of determining the number of executions of the ball effect that can be executed in the variable display game according to the type of the variable display pattern of the variable display game. The execution means (the effect control device 300) determines the specific in the variable display game when the game ball does not flow into the specific region (specific inflow port 767a) in any of the multiple ball effects in the single variable display game. The execution of the ball effect after the ball effect in which the game ball did not flow into the area is stopped.

  Therefore, whether or not to change the presentation mode of the variable display game is left to the player's free will, and the range of game characteristics of the variable display game is widened.

  In addition, a storage determination unit (effect control device 300, stored ball sensor 746a) capable of determining whether or not a game ball is stored in the ball storage unit (storage channel 742), and a ball effect execution unit (effect) And a ball effect execution determining means (effect control device 300) capable of determining whether or not to execute the ball effect by the control device 300), and the ball effect execution determining means (effect control device 300) is at least When it is determined that the game ball is stored by the storage determination means and the execution time of the variable display game is executed by a specific fluctuation pattern longer than a predetermined time, execution of the ball effect is determined. Yes.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the ball effect is performed in a state where the game balls are not stored and the game balls are not released. Further, by performing the ball effect at the time of executing the specific variation pattern, the variation display game is not ended without waiting for the end of the ball effect.

  Further, an inflow restricting member (effect rotating body 753) that can be converted into a restricting state that restricts the inflow of game balls into the specific region (specific inflow port 767a) and an allowable state that permits the inflow of game balls into the specific region. And an operation control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the operation of the inflow restricting member, and the operation control means (effect control device 300) is configured to perform the ball effect in the variable display game in which the ball effect is not executed. The inflow restricting member is operated in an operation mode different from the case of executing the above.

  Therefore, since the inflow state of the game ball to the specific area changes, the game performance of the ball effect is improved. In addition, even when the ball effect is not performed by the inflow restricting member, the variation display game can be excited.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a display device executes a variable display game with a plurality of identification information based on winning of a game ball in a start winning opening provided in the game area, and the variable display game In general, when a special result is obtained, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated.
In such a gaming machine, the display device is composed of a main display device and a sub display device disposed on one side of the main display device, and the sub display device overlaps the front of the main display device. In other words, a device in which the player can visually recognize the front and back of the sub-display device by rotating it around a spindle has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-087706).
By the way, in the gaming machine described in the above Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-087706, the sub display device rotates within a range of 180 degrees around a support shaft fixedly set on one side of the main display device. Therefore, there is a problem that only the display screen of the sub display device can be shown when it does not overlap the front of the main display device, and only the back side of the sub display device can be shown when it overlaps the front of the main display device. . Therefore, although the main display device is provided separately from the sub display device, it cannot be said that the sub display device is fully utilized, and the production effect has not been improved efficiently. .

  In contrast, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a main display device 41 that can display a main effect accompanying the progress of the game, and a sub-display device 801 that can display an auxiliary effect of the main effect. The moving means (sliding mechanism 820) capable of moving the sub display device 801 in front of the display section 41a of the main display device 41, and the front side of the sub display device 801 at the position moved by the moving means. Front / back reversing means (rotation drive unit 810) capable of reversing the back side and operation control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the operation of the sub display device 801 by the moving means and the front / back reversing means are provided. Yes.

  Accordingly, the movement and state conversion of the sub display device 801 can be performed independently, and the sub display device 801 can be reversed at the destination, so that the sub display device provided separately from the main display device 41 is provided. It is possible to efficiently improve the production effect by 801 and enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays, on the main display device 41, a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c as a main effect, and the variable display game is determined in advance. When a special result is obtained, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and the motion control means (the effect control device 300) is a moving means (sliding mechanism 820) according to the progress state of the variable display game. ), The sub display device 801 can be moved in front of any of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c.

  Therefore, the identification information displayed in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c can be shielded or exposed by the sub display device 801, and the variable display game can be effectively excited.

  Further, when moving the sub display device 801 during the variable display game, the motion control means (the effect control device 300) moves the sub display device 801 in front of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c that are still in the variable display. I try to move it.

  Therefore, it is possible to perform an auxiliary effect without hindering the visual recognition of identification information that has already been stopped or temporarily stopped.

  The variation display game is performed by stopping and displaying the identification information in a predetermined order in the plurality of variation display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c, and the motion control means (the effect control device 300) performs identification information in the variation display game. It is possible to repeat the movement of the sub display device 801 to the variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c where the identification information stops in accordance with the stop display order.

  Therefore, the auxiliary effect can be repeatedly performed in accordance with the stop display order of the identification information.

  Further, the operation control means (effect control apparatus 300) includes movement number setting means (effect control apparatus 300) capable of setting the number of movements of the sub display device 801 by the movement means (slide mechanism 820). The setting means sets the number of movements of the sub-display device 801 with a high probability as the expectation that the variable display game will have a special result is higher.

  Therefore, by associating the movement of the sub display device 801 with the expectation level of the variable display game, the player's interest can be attracted to the number of times the sub display device 801 is moved.

  In addition, the auxiliary display control unit (production control device 300) capable of displaying the auxiliary production on the sub display device 801 is provided, and the auxiliary production control unit (production control device 300) performs the sub display in the progress process of the variable display game. Identification information temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c positioned behind the device 801 can be temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 801 as an auxiliary effect.

  Accordingly, it is possible to perform a stop display effect of identification information having a stereoscopic effect that cannot be expressed by the main display device 41 alone.

  The front / back reversing means (production control device 300) is configured to reverse the front and back of the sub display device 801 by rotating the sub display device 801 about the rotation shaft (shaft portion 803). When the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 801 in the course of the variable display game, the means (the effect control device 300) causes the sub display device 801 to swing around the rotation axis. Yes.

  Therefore, the temporary stop state can be expressed by the swing of the sub display device 801. Further, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that it is in the temporary stop state.

  The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine including a main display device 41 that can display a main effect accompanying the progress of the game and a sub display device 801 that can display an auxiliary effect of the main effect. The sub display device 801 has a display area (display unit 802) for displaying an auxiliary effect on the front side, and a decoration portion is provided on the back side, so that the sub display device 801 can be visually recognized on the front side. And a state conversion means (rotation drive unit 810) capable of conversion to a second state in which the back side can be visually recognized, and a sub display device 801 whose state is converted by the state conversion means, is displayed on the display unit 41a of the main display device 41. Moving means (sliding mechanism 820) that can be moved in front of the camera, and operation control means (effect control apparatus 30) for controlling the operation of the sub display device 801 by the moving means and the state converting means. ), And it is equipped with a.

  Accordingly, the movement and state conversion of the sub display device 801 can be performed independently, and the sub display device 801 can be reversed at the destination, so that the sub display device provided separately from the main display device 41 is provided. It is possible to efficiently improve the production effect by 801 and enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays, on the main display device 41, a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c as a main effect, and the variable display game is determined in advance. When a special result is obtained, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and the sub display device 801 is set to the main display device 41 in a state where the front and back sides are directed forward. The variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c are set to a size that can be shielded, and the motion control means (production control device 300) is moved by the moving means (slide mechanism 820) according to the progress state of the variable display game. The sub display device 801 can be moved in front of one of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c.

  Therefore, the identification information displayed in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c can be shielded or exposed by the sub display device 801, and the variable display game can be effectively excited.

  The auxiliary display control unit (production control device 300) is capable of displaying the auxiliary effect on the sub display device 801, and the auxiliary effect control unit is positioned behind the sub display device 801 in the course of the variable display game. The identification information temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c to be displayed can be temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 801 as an auxiliary effect.

  Accordingly, it is possible to perform a stop display effect of identification information having a stereoscopic effect that cannot be expressed by the main display device 41 alone.

  Further, the state conversion means (rotation drive unit 810) converts the sub display device 801 into the first state and the second state by rotating the sub display device 801 about the rotation shaft (shaft portion 803). When the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub-display device 801 whose front side becomes visible during the course of the variable display game, the motion control means (the effect control device 300) is configured to rotate. The sub display device 801 is swung around the center.

  Therefore, the temporary stop state can be expressed by the swing of the sub display device 801. Further, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that it is in the temporary stop state.

  Further, when moving the sub display device 801 during the variable display game, the motion control means (the effect control device 300) moves the sub display device 801 in front of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c that are still in the variable display. I try to move it.

  Therefore, it is possible to perform an auxiliary effect without hindering the visual recognition of identification information that has already been stopped or temporarily stopped.

  The variation display game is performed by stopping and displaying the identification information in a predetermined order in the plurality of variation display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c, and the motion control means (the effect control device 300) performs identification information in the variation display game. It is possible to repeat the movement of the sub display device 801 to the variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c where the identification information stops in accordance with the stop display order.

  Therefore, the auxiliary effect can be repeatedly performed in accordance with the stop display order of the identification information.

  Further, the operation control means (effect control apparatus 300) includes movement number setting means (effect control apparatus 300) capable of setting the number of movements of the sub display device 801 by the movement means (slide mechanism 820). The setting means sets the number of movements of the sub-display device 801 with a high probability as the expectation that the variable display game will have a special result is higher.

  Therefore, by associating the movement of the sub display device 801 with the expectation level of the variable display game, the player's interest can be attracted to the number of times the sub display device 801 is moved.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the above Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-087706, the main display device and the sub display device are provided separately, but the characteristics of the sub display device can be fully utilized. In other words, the production effect was not improved efficiently.

  In contrast, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes a main display device 41 that can display a main effect accompanying the progress of the game, and a sub-display device 801 that can display an auxiliary effect of the main effect. The moving means (sliding mechanism 820) capable of moving the sub display device 801 in front of the display unit 41a of the main display device 41, and the operation control means for controlling the operation of the sub display device 801 by the moving means. (Effect control device 300) and display control means (effect control device 300) for controlling display on the main display device 41 and the sub display device 801. The display control means is provided in front of the main display device 41. An image that is not displayed on the main display device 41 can be displayed as an auxiliary effect.

  Therefore, it is possible to efficiently improve the production effect by the sub display device 801 provided separately from the main display device 41 and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 displays, on the main display device 41, a variable display game that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c as a main effect, and the variable display game is determined in advance. When a special result is obtained, it is configured to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the sub display device 801 shields one variable display area 42a, 42b, 42c set in the main display device 41. The motion control means (the effect control device 300) is set to a possible size, and the sub display device 801 is placed in front of one of the plurality of variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c according to the progress state of the variable display game. Can be moved.

  Therefore, the display on the sub display device 801 can be performed instead of the display on the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c, and a stereoscopic display that cannot be expressed only by the main display device 41 can be performed. So you can enhance the fun of the game.

  Further, the sub display device 801 is provided with a front / back reversing means (rotation drive unit 810) capable of rotating the sub display device 801 and reversing the front side and the back side, and the operation control means (production control device 300) is a sub display device by the front / back reversing means The operation control unit is configured to control the operation of 801, and the operation control unit rotates the sub display device 801 by the moving unit (sliding mechanism 820) in front of the variable display areas 42 a, 42 b, 42 c, and then rotates the front / back reversing unit. I am doing so.

  Accordingly, since the sub display device 801 can be reversed at the destination, the effect of the sub display device 801 provided separately from the main display device 41 can be improved efficiently, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, a standby area 830 that waits the sub display device 801 at a predetermined position that is not located in front of the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is provided. The standby area 830 rotates the sub display device 801 so that the front side and the back side are rotated. The width cannot be reversed, and the operation control means (production control device 300) rotates the sub display device 801 when the sub display device 801 is moved to a position away from the standby area 830.

  Therefore, the area of the standby area 830 can be reduced, and the space of the game board 30 can be used efficiently.

  In addition, the sub display device 801 includes a display area (display unit 802) that displays at least the auxiliary effect on the front side, and the operation control means (effect control device 300) displays the sub display device 801 in a specific variable display area 42a, The display control means (production control device 300) is operated so as to be reversed to the front side in front of 42b and 42c, and when the sub display device 801 rotates from the back side to the front side, the specific variable display areas 42a, 42b, Identification information that is temporarily stopped and displayed on 42c can be temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 801.

  Therefore, the display on the main display device 41 can be replaced with the display on the sub display device 801, and the effect of the display by the sub display device 801 provided separately from the main display device 41 can be improved efficiently, and the game can be enjoyed. Can be increased.

  Further, the operation control means (effect control device 300) causes the display control means (effect control device 300) to stop display the identification information temporarily stopped in the specific variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c on the sub display device 801. In this case, the sub display device 801 is swung.

  Therefore, it is possible to clearly recognize that the vehicle is temporarily stopped.

Also, a random display is performed by extracting random numbers based on winning of game balls to the start winning opening (the first special figure 1 starting winning opening 36, the second special figure 1 starting winning opening 641, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). A start storage means (game control device 100) that can be stored as a start memory for execution, and a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means before the execution of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory Predetermining means (game control device 100) capable of determining, and continuous effect executing means (effect control device 300) for executing continuous effects over a plurality of variable display games based on the determination result of the prior determining means. ), And the operation control means (effect control device 300) and the display control means (effect control device 300) perform multiple effects when the continuous effect is executed by the continuous effect execution means. And so as to perform an auxiliary effect with the operation of the sub-display device 801 in each of the variable display game.

  Therefore, it is possible to effectively enhance the effect of continuous production using the sub display device 801, and to improve the interest of the game.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the upper speaker 19a is provided at the position where the lighting device 16 is disposed, the curtain speaker unit 500 is provided in place of the curtain, and illumination. It differs from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a movable effect device 900 is provided instead of the device 16 and the frame decoration device 18. Further, the configuration of the gaming board 30 is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, parts having the same configurations as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

《Screenboard speaker unit》
FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 81, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment does not include the lighting device 16 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the lighting device in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. The upper speaker 19a (upper left speaker 19a1, upper right speaker 19a2) is provided at the position where the 16 is provided.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment does not include the curtain plate provided in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the position where the curtain plate is provided in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In addition, a curtain plate speaker unit 500 is provided.
The curtain plate speaker unit 500 includes a box-shaped member with a lid (space forming member 520) having a space inside, and a speaker (lower speaker 510) disposed inside the box-shaped member with a lid. ing.
In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the production | presentation control apparatus 300 of this embodiment, the speaker (lower speaker 510) with which the curtain board speaker unit 500 is provided in parallel with amplifier circuit 337a, 337b (refer FIG. 22) is driven. An amplifier circuit is provided. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as game sound control means capable of controlling game sounds output from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b, and lower speaker 510) as the game progresses.
In the case of this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 may not include the lower speaker 19b.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment does not include the frame decoration device 18 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the frame decoration device 18 is provided in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. A movable effect device 900 (left frame effect device (left movable effect device) 901, right frame effect device (movable on the right side) is provided at the position (ie, the left and right parts of the glass frame 15) and the upper part of the glass frame 15. Effect device) 902, and upper frame effect device (upper movable effect device) 903).
Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of movable effect devices 900, that is, a left frame effect device 901, a right frame effect device 902, and an upper frame effect device 903 are a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a frame effect provided in the effect control device 300. The motor control circuit 335 (see FIG. 22) is configured to be driven and controlled. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an operation control unit that can control the effect operation performed by the plurality of movable effect devices 900.

FIG. 82 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 82, on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12, there is a ball storage tank 81 for storing game balls before payout and information to the outside (for example, a symbol confirmation signal, jackpot signal, probability variation signal, prize ball) An external information terminal board 71 for outputting a signal, a lending signal, etc. is provided. In addition, the upper part of the rear surface of the front frame 12 is connected to the bottom of the ball storage tank 81 and connected to the chute having a gentle inclination and guiding the game ball toward one side of the gaming machine 10 and the end of the chute. In addition, a ball rectifying path 82 is provided that includes a bent flow path device that converts the flow direction of the game ball from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. A payout unit 83 having a drive source is disposed at the lower end of the bent flow path device of the ball rectifying path 82, and a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by the payout unit 83.

Further, an effect control device 300, a game control device 100, and the like are provided at the center of the rear surface of the front frame 12, and a payout control device 200 that controls the payout unit 83 and a game control device 100 are provided at the lower back of the front frame 12. A power supply device 400 that supplies power to various control devices such as the above, a curtain speaker unit 500, and the like are provided.
Note that the back surface structure of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment is substantially the same as the back surface structure of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, except that the curtain plate speaker unit 500 is a curtain plate.

FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of a frame portion provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 83, the gaming machine 10 is supported by a rectangular frame-shaped main body frame (outer frame, machine frame) 11 fixed to the island facility of the game store and the main body frame 11 so that the game ball can be opened and closed. A front frame (inner frame, storage frame, master unit) 12 having a game board storage portion 12a for storing a game board 30 in which a flowable game area 32 is formed, and can be opened and closed on the front side of the front frame 12 And a glass frame (holding frame, decorative frame) 15 that holds the transparent member (cover glass 14) in correspondence with the window 15a that allows the game area 32 to be visually recognized.
The speaker unit (screen board speaker unit 500) is disposed between the bottom plate (lower lid 11b) of the outer frame (main body frame 11) and the lower part of the inner frame (front frame 12) with the front frame 12 closed. As shown, it is attached to the lower part of the main body frame 11.
Further, the ball storage tank 81 is disposed on the upper rear surface of the front frame 12.
Further, the upper speaker 19a (upper left speaker 19a1, upper right speaker 19a2) is disposed on the upper front of the glass frame 15, and includes a plurality of movable effect devices 900 (left frame effect device 901, right frame effect device 902, The upper frame effect device 903) is disposed on the periphery of the window portion 15a in the front surface of the glass frame 15.

FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the state in which the curtain panel speaker unit 500 is detached from the main body frame 11 as seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 84, the main body frame 11 is formed by joining upper and lower reeds (upper reed 11 a and lower reed 11 b) and left and right vertical reeds (left reed 11 c and right reed 11 d) in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. Is.
Hinges 13 for assembling the front frame 12 to the main body frame 11 so as to be openable and closable are provided above and below the left and right sides of the main body frame 11 (left side in the present embodiment).
The curtain plate speaker unit 500 is attached to the main body frame 11 from the front of the main body frame 11 so as to be disposed between the lower rod 11b and the lower hinge 13.

FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of curtain plate speaker unit 500. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the curtain plate member 540 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 87 is a perspective view of the back box member 530 with the lower speaker 510 disposed therein as viewed from the front side. FIG. 88 is a cross-sectional view of curtain plate speaker unit 500. In FIG. 88, for convenience, hatching to be added to the cross section is omitted.
The speaker unit (screenboard speaker unit 500) outputs a game sound related to the game (lower speaker 510) and the game sound output from the speaker (lower speaker 510) to the sound deriving unit 540c. And a space forming member 520 that forms the sound guide space S.
In the first embodiment and the present embodiment, speaker units including a speaker main body and a punching net provided in front of the speaker main body are referred to as an upper speaker 19a and a lower speaker 19b. , Refers only to the speaker body.

Here, in the gaming machine 10, the game balls used for the game enter the out port 32 a without winning any of the winning ports, or enter the out port 32 a from the gaming area 32. Discharged. And the game ball discharged | emitted from the game area | region 32 flows in into the flow-path formation unit 84 (refer FIG. 89) arrange | positioned ahead of the power supply device 400. FIG.
On the upper part of the flow path forming unit 84, there is provided a ball collecting section (discharge ball introducing port) 84a for introducing the game balls discharged from the game area 32 into the flow path forming unit 84, thereby forming the flow path. A ball discharge portion (ball discharge port) 84b for discharging game balls to the outside is provided at the lower portion of the unit 84, and the game balls paid out as prize balls are placed inside the flow path forming unit 84. A lower tray guide path for guiding to the tray 23, a discharge guide path for guiding the game balls collected from the game area 32 to the ball discharge section 84b, and the like are provided.
The game balls discharged from the ball discharge portion 84b of the flow path forming unit 84 are provided at the lower part of the island facility of the game store via the out tank device T provided for each gaming machine 10 in the island facility of the game store. It is discharged to the out tub (not shown).
That is, on the back side of the inner frame (front frame 12), there is a ball discharge portion 84b for discharging game balls collected from the game area 32 so as to face the speaker unit (screen speaker unit 500). Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the space forming member 520 has a back box member (back surface member) 530 having a concave chamber that has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape and opened forward, and an opening of the back box member 530 from the front. A curtain plate member (front member) 540 for closing is combined. The space forming member 520 (in the case of the present embodiment, the back box member 530) has a recessed portion (recessed portion) 520a in which an upper portion corresponding to the ball discharge portion 84b (see FIG. 89) is recessed over a predetermined range. Is formed.

The curtain speaker unit 500 often outputs low-range game sounds, and in order to output high-quality game sounds, it is preferable that the space forming member 520 has a large internal space (that is, the sound guide space S). . On the other hand, if the internal space of the space forming member 520 is increased, the outer size of the curtain plate speaker unit 500 is increased. Therefore, the curtain plate speaker unit 500 is disposed on the out tank device T disposed below the ball discharge portion 84b. It will interfere with the ball tray portion Ta (see FIG. 89).
For example, when the space forming member of the curtain plate speaker unit is not provided with the recess 520a, the thickness (length in the front-rear direction) and the height (length in the vertical direction) of the space forming member It is necessary to set the thickness and height so as not to interfere with the portion Ta. That is, it is necessary to set so that the upper surface of the space forming member is positioned below the lower surface of the ball tray portion Ta, and the rear surface of the space forming member is positioned forward of the front surface of the ball tray portion Ta.

On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, since the hollow part 520a is provided, it is not necessary to set the thickness or height of the space forming member to a thickness or height that does not interfere with the ball tray part Ta. .
Specifically, in the present embodiment, the upper surface of the space forming member 520 is located above the lower surface of the ball tray portion Ta. In addition, the space forming member 520 protrudes to a position directly below the ball discharge portion 84b (or to a position behind the lower end 11b but ahead of the rear end of the lower collar 11b), and the rear surface of the space forming member 520 Is located behind the front surface of the ball tray portion Ta. And the lower front side of the ball | bowl tray part Ta is distribute | arranged in the hollow part 520a (refer FIG. 89).
In addition, the position (two places on the left and right of the back surface portion of the space forming member) to which the fixture for fixing the main body frame 11 (the lower arm 11b) of the space forming member 520 is attached to the game island is recessed forward. The retracting recess may be formed by the above.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving tray portion Ta of the out tank device T does not hit the curtain plate speaker unit 500 by the recess portion 520a. Therefore, the curtain speaker unit 500 that can secure a large internal space (that is, the sound guide space S) of the space forming member 520 without interfering with the out-tank device T and can output a high-quality game sound. It can be configured.
Here, the “predetermined range” of the “recessed portion (concave portion) 520a in which the upper part corresponding to the ball discharge portion 84b is recessed over a predetermined range” refers to the size of the space forming member 520 and the ball tray portion Ta. However, it is a range that includes at least a portion that collides with the out tank apparatus T when the hollow portion 520a is not formed in the space forming member 520. Of course, the smaller the predetermined range is, the larger the internal space of the space forming member 520 is. Therefore, it is preferable that the predetermined range is not unnecessarily large.

As shown in FIGS. 85, 87, and 88, a speaker support portion (speaker support wall portion 531) that supports a speaker (lower speaker 510) is substantially perpendicular to the left-right direction inside the back box member 530. It is arranged.
At the center of the speaker support wall portion 531, a substantially circular through-hole 531a having a diameter equivalent to the front side of the lower speaker 510 is formed. In the lower speaker 510, the screws passed through the screw holes of the fixing pieces 511 provided in the periphery (four corners) on the front side with the front and back facing left and right and the front side corresponding to the through holes 531a are attached to the mounting boss 531b. By being screwed in, it is fixed to the speaker support wall 531 and fixed inside the back box member 530.
In the present embodiment, the four mounting bosses 531b are provided on the curtain plate speaker unit 500 so as to correspond to the screw holes of the fixing pieces 511 of the lower speaker 510, but the mounting boss 531b provided on the curtain plate speaker unit 500 is provided. The number can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

The speaker support portion (speaker support wall portion 531) is formed over the sound guide space S. Further, when the lower speaker 510 is attached to the speaker support wall 531, the through-hole 531 a of the speaker support wall 531 is blocked by the lower speaker 510. Therefore, when the lower speaker 510 is attached to the speaker support wall portion 531, the inside of the back box member 530 (that is, the sound guide space S) is divided into left and right.
Hereinafter, in the sound guide space S, the left side of the speaker support wall 531 is referred to as a left acoustic space SL, and the right side of the speaker support wall 531 is referred to as a right acoustic space SR. That is, the sound introduction space S is a first sound introduction space (left acoustic space SL) for guiding game sounds output from one side of the front and back of the speaker (lower speaker 510) (front side in the case of the present embodiment), A second sound introduction space (right acoustic space SR) for guiding game sounds output from the other side of the speaker (lower speaker 510) (the back side in the case of the present embodiment).

  In the present embodiment, the speaker support wall portion 531 is disposed at a position inside the back box member 530 that avoids the recess portion 520a (in the present embodiment, a position on the right side of the recess portion 520a). That is, the speaker (lower speaker 510) is shifted leftward and rightward from the recess 520a in a state where the front and back are directed in the left-right direction (in the case of the present embodiment, the front side is directed leftward and the backside is directed rightward). (In the case of the present embodiment, the position shifted to the right).

As shown in FIG. 87, the peripheral edge portion of the front opening of the back box member 530 is a fitting portion 530a that fits into the curtain plate member 540 (specifically, the fitting receiving portion 540a of the curtain plate member 540). ing.
A stopper rib 532 is provided at the rear end of the fitting portion 530a of the back box member 530 so as to protrude outward.
In addition, a plurality of inclined ribs 533 protruding upward are provided on the upper surface of the back box member 530 substantially along the front-rear direction. The inclined rib 533 is formed so that the protruding height gradually decreases toward the rear side. As a result, the game ball falling on the upper surface of the curtain board speaker unit 500 can be guided to an out bowl (not shown) provided at the lower part of the island facility of the game store.

As shown in FIGS. 85, 86, and 88, the curtain plate member 540 that is a lid that closes the front opening of the back box member 530 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape whose outer shape (depth) is thinner than that of the back box member 530. It has a concave chamber that opens to the rear.
A peripheral edge portion of the rear surface opening of the curtain plate member 540 is a fitting receiving portion 540a into which the fitting portion 530a of the back box member 530 is fitted. In the case of this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 88, in a state where the curtain plate member 540 is attached to the back box member 530, the fitting receiving portion 540a covers the fitting portion 530a from the outside, and the fitting receiving portion The rear end of 540a is configured to abut against a stopper rib 532 that borders the fitting portion 530a. Accordingly, unnecessary gaps are not generated in the state where the curtain plate member 540 is attached to the back box member 530, so that a higher quality game sound can be output.

On the left and right sides of the front part (decoration part 540b) of the curtain plate member 540, the game sound output from the lower speaker 510 and guided by the sound guide space S is emitted to the outside (front) of the curtain plate speaker unit 500. A sound derivation unit 540c is provided.
Specifically, the left part of the curtain plate member 540 is formed with a left sound emitting hole 540c1 as a sound derivation part 540c for emitting a game sound guided by the left acoustic space SL in the sound guide space S. In the right part of the curtain plate member 540, a right sound emitting hole 540c2 for releasing a game sound guided by the right acoustic space SR in the sound guiding space S is formed as a sound derivation portion 540c. . That is, the sound deriving unit 540c includes a first sound deriving unit (left sound emitting hole 540c1) for deriving the game sound guided by the first sound introduction space (left acoustic space SL) to the front side of the gaming machine 10, and A second sound derivation unit (right sound emission hole 540c2) for deriving the game sound guided by the two sound guide spaces (right acoustic space SR) to the front side of the gaming machine 10;

The second sound derivation section (right sound emission hole 540c2) is covered from behind by a diaphragm (passive radiator (drone cone) 560) that resonates with game sound output from the speaker (lower speaker 510). The sound derivation part (left sound emission hole 540c1) is covered from behind by a punching net 550 provided with a plurality of sound transmission holes.
Note that the left sound emission hole 540c1 may be covered with the passive radiator 560 and the right sound emission hole 540c2 may be covered with the punching net 550. Further, both the left sound emitting hole 540c1 and the right sound emitting hole 540c2 may be covered with the punching net 550 or the passive radiator 560.

Since the passive radiator 560 can resonate with the sound wave propagating through the sound guide space S and enhance the sound wave (especially the sound wave in the low frequency range) emitted from the sound derivation unit 540c, the left sound emission hole 540c1. And a passive radiator 560 in one of the right sound emission holes 540c2 and a punching net 550 in any of the other, thereby enhancing two types of sounds (specifically, particularly low frequencies). Sound and unenhanced sound) can be output simultaneously.
Further, the passive radiator type in which the sound derivation unit 540c is covered with the passive radiator 560 is easy because it is not necessary to have an electric drive system, but a bass reflex type (bass reflex type enclosure) is adopted instead of the passive radiator type. Is also possible.

Here, in the present embodiment, the direction of the sound derivation section 540c (in the case of the present embodiment, the right sound emission hole 540c2) covered with the passive radiator 560 is a gaming machine in which the speaker unit (screen plate speaker unit 500) is above. 10 is set obliquely upward so that a game sound is derived toward a firing operation handle (operation unit 24) provided on the front surface (see FIG. 91).
Thereby, since the player's hand operating the operation unit 24 can be stimulated by the low frequency vibration, the effect of the sound is improved.

In addition, the direction of the sound derivation unit 540c covered by the passive radiator 560 may be set so that the game sound is derived toward the abdomen of the player sitting in front of the game machine 10 (the center direction of the game machine 10). Is possible. In this case, since the player's abdomen can be stimulated by the low frequency vibration, the effect of sound is improved.
Further, for example, when both the left sound emitting hole 540c1 and the right sound emitting hole 540c2 are covered with the passive radiator 560, the sound deriving unit 540c (in the present embodiment) closer to the operation unit 24 of the two left and right sound deriving units 540c. In this case, the direction of the right sound emission hole 540c2) is set so that the game sound is derived toward the operation unit 24, and the sound deriving unit 540c far from the operation unit 24 of the two right and left sound deriving units 540c (this embodiment) In the case of the embodiment, by setting the direction of the left sound emission hole 540c1) so that the game sound is derived toward the abdomen of the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10, it is possible to produce an effective sound effect. Become.

The length of the curtain plate member 540 in the vertical direction is such that the lower end portion of the curtain plate member 540 projects below the lower surface of the back box member 530 when the curtain plate member 540 is attached to the back box member 530. The length of the member 530 is set longer than the vertical length.
The length of the curtain plate member 540 in the left-right direction is such that the left end portion of the curtain plate member 540 protrudes to the left of the left surface of the back box member 530 when the curtain plate member 540 is attached to the back box member 530. It is set longer than the length of the back box member 530 in the left-right direction so that the right end portion of the curtain plate member 540 protrudes to the right from the right surface of the back box member 530.
Thus, in a state where the curtain plate speaker unit 500 is attached to the main body frame 11, the rear surface of the lower end portion (lower heel contact portion 540d) of the curtain plate member 540 comes into contact with the front surface of the lower ridge 11b of the main body frame 11. The rear surface of the left end portion of the plate member 540 contacts the lower front surface of the port 11c of the main body frame 11, and the rear surface of the right end portion of the curtain plate member 540 contacts the lower front surface of the starboard 11d of the main body frame 11. Positioning of the speaker unit 500 with respect to the main body frame 11 in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is facilitated. Further, since the lower frame 11b, the lower front surface of the port 11c and the lower front surface of the starboard 11d are covered from the front by the curtain plate member 540, it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance by hiding the main frame 11. Become.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 86, a position corresponding to the lower hinge 13 provided on the main body frame 11 on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 540 is used to support the lower hinge 13 from below. A hinge support portion 541 is provided.
The hinge support portion 541 is formed substantially along the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the abutment portion 541a that abuts the lower surface of the flat plate portion of the lower hinge 13 and the projection portion (hinge body portion) of the lower hinge 13. Groove portion 541b.
In the present embodiment, the protruding portion of the lower hinge 13 protrudes from the lower surface of the flat plate portion of the lower hinge 13. For this reason, when the curtain plate speaker unit 500 is attached to or detached from the main body frame 11 or when the curtain plate speaker unit 500 is attached to the main body frame 11, the protruding portion from the lower surface of the flat plate portion is obstructive. To prevent this, the hinge support portion 541 is provided with a groove portion 541b into which the portion can enter.

Further, at the position corresponding to the sliding contact fitting 12b (see FIG. 82) attached to the lower end portion of the front frame 12 main body on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 540, the lower end of the inner frame (front frame 12) is brought into contact. A load support portion 542 that supports the load of the inner frame (front frame 12) is provided.
In the state where the front frame 12 is closed, the curtain panel speaker unit 500 and the front frame 12 are configured to come into contact mainly with the load support portion 542 and the sliding contact fitting 12b. As a result, the front frame 12 can be opened and closed more smoothly than when the entire upper surface of the curtain plate member 540 is in contact with the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, three load support portions 542 are provided in the curtain plate speaker unit 500, but the number of load support portions 542 provided in the curtain plate speaker unit 500 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

Here, the load support portion 542 is formed above the space forming member 520 (in the present embodiment, the curtain plate member 540) so as to line up and down with the speaker support portion (speaker support wall portion 531) (FIG. 90). Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, the rightmost load support portion 542 among the three load support portions 542 arranged on the left and right is formed on the upper portion of the curtain plate member 540 so as to line up with the speaker support wall portion 531. Has been.
Thus, by arranging the speaker support wall portion 531 at a position corresponding to the load support portion 542, the speaker support wall portion 531 deforms the curtain speaker unit 500 together with the lower speaker 510 (the load of the front frame 12). Therefore, the space forming member 520 is prevented from being deformed). Further, by receiving the load of the front frame 12 via the sliding metal fitting 12b by the load support portion 542, it is possible to suppress vibration (resonance) around the lower speaker 510 during the output of the game sound. Therefore, it is possible to prevent sound cracking and output a higher quality game sound.

As shown in FIG. 86, at the position corresponding to the front frame 12 on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 540, a folded portion (back-up portion) 543 protruding upward is provided so as to avoid the load support portion 542. It has been.
An entry preventing wall (not shown) formed at the lower portion of the front frame 12 main body is engaged with the folded portion 543, and the entry preventing wall and the folded portion 543 are used to engage the folded portion 543 from the front of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to prevent unauthorized members from entering.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the curtain plate speaker unit 500 instead of the curtain plate, but the space forming member 520 of the curtain plate speaker unit 500 has an upper portion corresponding to the ball discharge portion 84b. Is formed over a predetermined range, so even if the internal space (sound guiding space S) of the space forming member 520 is large, the lower portion of the ball discharge portion 84b. When the ball receiving tray portion Ta of the out tank device T is disposed, the curtain speaker unit 500 does not get in the way. Therefore, the curtain speaker unit 500 can secure a large internal space (sound guiding space S) of the space forming member 520, and can output a high-quality sound (particularly low sound).

《Movable production device》
FIG. 92 is a front view of each unit attached to the front surface of the glass frame 15 main body (the base plate of the glass frame 15).
As shown in FIG. 92, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 main body, a left frame effect device (left movable effect device) 901, a right frame effect device (right movable effect device) 902, and an upper frame effect device (upper movable effect device). 903 and the lower decoration part 29 are attached so that the window part 15a may be surrounded, and the upper plate unit 21U is attached below the lower decoration part 29. That is, the holding frame (glass frame 15) provided on the front side of the storage frame (front frame 12) so that it can be opened and closed has a plurality of movable effect devices 900 (left side) capable of performing effect operations according to the progress of the game. A frame effect device 901, a right frame effect device 902, and an upper frame effect device 903).

The upper frame effect device 903 is configured integrally with an error notification lamp (dispensing abnormality notification lamp) 17 and an upper speaker 19a (upper left speaker 19a1, upper right speaker 19a2).
The lower decoration part 29 has an LED substrate and the like, and is configured to emit light for decoration and production. The lower decorative portion 29 is configured integrally with a ball lending panel portion 27P having a ball lending button 27, a discharge button 28, and the like.
In addition to the upper plate 21, the upper plate unit 21U includes an effect button 25 (decision button 251 and select button 252), a lower speaker 19b, and the like.
The lower plate unit 23U (see FIG. 91) including the lower plate 23 and the like, the keyhole 26 and the keyhole decoration member 26D (see FIG. 91) for decorating the periphery of the keyhole 26, etc. 12 base plates).

The left frame effect device 901, the right frame effect device 902, and the upper frame effect device 903 have a plurality of movable effect members 910 for performing effect operations and a drive unit for causing the plurality of movable effect members 910 to perform effect operations. 920, respectively.
Here, the holding frame (glass frame 15) is attached to the front side of the storage frame (front frame 12) on the left and right sides (left side in the case of this embodiment) and the left and right other sides (right side in the case of this embodiment). ) Is moved in the left-right direction so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the hinge 13 is disposed on the left side of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the left side of the glass frame 15 on the hinge 13 side cannot be protruded so much forward due to the opening of the glass frame 15.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the front-rear width of each movable effect device 900 increases in the order of left frame effect device 901 <upper frame effect device 903 <right frame effect device 902. That is, it is arranged on the left and right sides of the window portion 15a rather than the forward projecting amount of the other side movable effect device (in the case of this embodiment, the right frame effect device 902) arranged on the left and right sides of the window portion 15a. The one-side movable effect device (in the case of this embodiment, the left frame effect device 901) is set so that the amount of forward protrusion is smaller.
Note that the amount of forward protrusion of the right frame effect device 902 and the upper frame effect device 903 may be the same.

  Further, the size or operation width of the movable effect member 910 is configured to be larger in proportion to the front-rear width of the movable effect device 900. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the size or the operation width of the movable effect member 910 is such that the movable effect member 910 provided in the left frame effect device 901 <the movable effect member 910 provided in the upper frame effect device 903 <the right frame effect device. The movable effect member 910 provided in 902 increases in order. That is, the size of the window 15a or the operation width of the movable effect member 910 provided in the one side movable effect device (in the case of the present embodiment, the left frame effect device 901) arranged on the left and right sides of the window portion 15a. The size or the operation width of the movable effect member 910 provided in the other side movable effect device (in the case of this embodiment, the right frame effect device 902) arranged on the left and right other side is set to be larger.

The configuration of each movable effect device 900 is substantially the same except that the amount of forward projection, the size or the operation width of the movable effect member 910 is different, and hence the right frame effect device 902 will be used below. A specific configuration will be described.
FIG. 93 is an exploded front view of movable effect device 900 (right frame effect device 902). FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the drive unit 920, and FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX of FIG. In FIG. 95, for convenience, there is a portion where hatching to be added to the cross section is omitted.

93 to 95, the movable effect device 900 includes a plurality of movable effect members 910 arranged on the front side of the holding frame (glass frame 15) so as to be aligned along the periphery of the window 15a, and movable. A drive unit 920 that operates the effect member 910, a light emitting decoration unit 930 that performs decoration and production by light emission, a base member 940 for attaching the movable effect member 910, the drive unit 920, and the light emission decoration unit 930 to the main body of the glass frame 15. And a transparent cover member 950 that covers the base member 940 from the front.
In this embodiment, the left frame effect device 901 is provided with five movable effect members 910, the right frame effect device 902 is provided with five movable effect members 910, and the upper frame effect device 903 is provided with three movable effect members 910. Although configured, the number of movable effect members 910 provided in each movable effect device 900 can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is plural.

As shown in FIG. 95, the base member 940 includes a base main body member 941 and a cover lens member 942 that covers the base main body member 941 from the front.
As shown in FIG. 94, the drive unit 920 has a curved rod-shaped first link member (curved rod) 921 and a curved rod-shaped member disposed outside the first link member 921 (on the side opposite to the window portion 15a). A link slider 923 provided to correspond to each of the second link member (curved rod) 922 and the movable effect member 910, for connecting the link members 921, 922 and the movable effect member 910, and the link members 921, 922. And a drive motor 924 that generates a driving force for operating the movable effect member 910.

The link slider 923 is a member formed by joining a chevron flat plate portion 923a constituting the front portion of the link slider 923 and a rectangular flat plate portion 923b constituting the rear portion, and the link pin 923c and the sliding pin 923d which are orthogonal to each other. And.
Specifically, the link pin 923c is arranged from one surface of the chevron flat plate portion 923a so as to be disposed substantially perpendicular to the chevron flat plate portion 923a standing on one surface of the rectangular flat plate portion 923b. It protrudes. In addition, the sliding pin 923d is disposed so as to be substantially perpendicular to the rectangular flat plate portion 923b. The other surface of the rectangular flat plate portion 923b (on the side opposite to the surface on which the angled flat plate portion 923a is erected). Protruding from the surface).

The first link member 921 is a link member connected to the odd-numbered movable effect member 910 via the link slider 923, and is disposed in the base body member 941 of the base member 940.
Here, in the left frame effect device 901 and the right frame effect device 902, the “odd-numbered movable effect member 910” means a plurality of (5 in the present embodiment) movable effect members 910 arranged one above the other. It is the movable production | generation member 910 which becomes an odd-number when it counts in order from. In the upper frame effect device 903, “odd-numbered movable effect member 910” means that a plurality (three in this embodiment) of movable effect members 910 arranged in the left and right direction are counted in order from the left and right sides. It is the movable production | generation member 910 used as an odd number.

One end portion of the first link member 921 is a gear portion 921a formed with a plurality of teeth protruding outward (on the side opposite to the window portion 15a). When the gear portion 921a meshes with the gear 924a of the drive motor 924 for the first link member 921, the first link member 921 operates the movable effect member 910 by the driving force from the drive motor 924 (in the case of this embodiment). , A rotating operation) (in the case of this embodiment, an arcuate sliding operation along the periphery of the window portion 15a) is performed.
In addition, the first link member 921 is provided with a protruding piece 921b that protrudes toward the outside (the side opposite to the window portion 15a) corresponding to each of the odd-numbered movable effect members 910. An elongated slide guide groove 921c penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in 921b.

The second link member 922 is a link member connected to the even-numbered movable effect member 910 via the link slider 923, and is arranged in parallel with the first link member 921 in the base body member 941 of the base member 940. Yes.
Here, in the left frame effect device 901 and the right frame effect device 902, the “even-numbered movable effect member 910” refers to a plurality of (5 in the present embodiment) movable effect members 910 arranged vertically. It is the movable effect member 910 which becomes an even number when counted in order. In the upper frame effect device 903, “even-numbered movable effect member 910” means that a plurality (three in the present embodiment) of movable effect members 910 arranged in the left and right direction are counted in order from the left and right sides. It is the movable production | generation member 910 used as the even number.

One end portion of the second link member 922 is a gear portion 922a formed with a plurality of teeth protruding outward (on the side opposite to the window portion 15a). The gear portion 922a meshes with the gear 924a of the drive motor 924 for the second link member 922, so that the second link member 922 operates the movable effect member 910 by the driving force from the drive motor 924 (in this embodiment). , A rotating operation) (in the case of this embodiment, an arcuate sliding operation along the periphery of the window portion 15a) is performed.
In addition, the second link member 922 is provided with a protruding piece 922b that protrudes toward the inside (the window portion 15a side) corresponding to each of the even-numbered movable effect members 910, and each protruding piece 922b includes A long hole-shaped slide guide groove 922c penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed.

The slide guide grooves 921c and 922c provided in the link members 921 and 922 are formed so as to be slidably inserted through the slide pin 923d of the link slider 923.
As shown in FIG. 95, the base body member 941 is provided with a long hole 941a formed in a size that allows the sliding pin 923d of the link slider 923 to be slidably inserted.
The link slider 923 and the link members 921 and 922 are configured such that the slide pin 923d of the link slider 923 is connected to the link member 940 from the front of the base body member 941 of the base member 940 through the elongated hole 941a of the base body member 941. By being inserted into the slide guide grooves 921c and 922c of 921 and 922, they are connected.

Here, as shown in FIG. 94, the slide guide grooves 921c and 922c of the link members 921 and 922 are oblique to the normal direction of the link members 921 and 922 (hereinafter simply referred to as “normal direction”). Extends in the direction. The elongated hole 941a of the base body member 941 extends substantially along the normal direction.
The slide pin 923d of the link slider 923 is inserted into the slide guide grooves 921c and 922c while being inserted into the long hole 941a. That is, the sliding pin 923d is in a state where movement in a direction other than the direction along the long hole 941a (that is, a direction other than the direction substantially along the normal direction) is restricted, and the slide guide grooves 921c and 922c Is engaged. Accordingly, the link slider 923 moves in the normal direction because the slide pin 923d is pushed by the slide guide grooves 921c and 922c of the link members 921 and 922 when the link members 921 and 922 slide along the periphery of the window portion 15a. Slide and move in a direction approximately along

  Further, as shown in FIG. 95, the cover lens member 942 of the base member 940 is provided with a first elongated hole 942a formed in a size that allows the mountain-shaped flat plate portion 923a of the link slider 923 to be slidably inserted. ing. The first long hole 942a extends in the same direction as the long hole 941a of the base body member 941 (that is, a direction substantially along the normal direction). Accordingly, the link slider 923 can be reliably restricted from moving in a direction other than the direction along the elongated hole 941a of the base body member 941 (that is, a direction other than the direction substantially along the normal direction). It becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 93, the movable effect member 910 has a shape curved outward (on the opposite side to the window 15a) along the periphery of the window 15a. As shown in FIG. 95, the movable effect member 910 has a substantially teardrop shape in which the cross section along the normal direction includes an acute angle (which may be a right angle or an obtuse angle; the same applies hereinafter) part and a curved part. The base member 940 is disposed in front of the cover lens member 942 such that the acute angle portion faces the front and the curved portion faces the rear.
From the two flat surfaces constituting the movable effect member 910 (the upper and lower surfaces in the case of the left frame effect device 901 and the right frame effect device 902, the left surface and the right surface in the case of the upper frame effect device 903) with respect to the normal direction A pivot shaft 911 that is substantially orthogonal is projected. The cover lens member 942 of the base member 940 is provided with a bearing portion (not shown), and the movable effect member 910 inserts the tip end portion of the rotation shaft 911 into the bearing portion of the cover lens member 942, thereby Attached to 940 in a freely rotatable manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 95, an engagement pin 912 that engages with a link pin 923c of the link slider 923 is formed from the curved surface of the movable effect member 910 (the surface constituting the curved portion of the substantially teardrop shape). It protrudes.
The cover lens member 942 of the base member 940 is provided with a recess corresponding to the curved surface of the movable effect member 910. The engagement pin 912 of the movable effect member 910 can be slidably inserted into the recess. A second elongated hole 942b having a size is provided. The second long hole 942b also extends in the same direction as the long hole 941a of the base main body member 941 (that is, a direction substantially along the normal direction).
The link slider 923 and the movable effect member 910 are configured such that the engagement pin 912 of the movable effect member 910 is inserted from the front of the cover lens member 942 of the base member 940 through the second long hole 942b of the cover lens member 942. By being engaged with the link pin 923c of the link slider 923, the connection is made.

Here, when the link members 921 and 922 are slid along the periphery of the window portion 15a and the link slider 923 is slid in the direction substantially along the normal direction, the movable pin member 910 is engaged. Is pushed by the link pin 923c of the link slider 923 and rotates in a direction substantially along the normal direction.
That is, the plurality of movable effect members 910 can operate in a first state approaching the center of the window portion 15a and a second state far from the center of the window portion 15a, and is parallel to the surface of the transparent member (cover glass 14). The first state and the second state are converted by a rotation operation around the rotation shaft 911.
Therefore, by converting the plurality of movable effect members 910 from the first state to the second state, it is possible to make the window portion 15a appear to be enlarged (see FIG. 96 (b)). Further, by converting the plurality of movable effect members 910 from the second state to the first state, the window portion 15a can appear as if it has been reduced (see FIG. 96A).
Note that all of the movable effect members 910 are in an inward state (see FIG. 96 (a)) and all of the movable effect members 910 are in an outward state (see FIG. 96 (b)). May be set.
Further, a part of the game board 30 may be visible and hidden (exposed or shielded) by the conversion operation of the plurality of movable effect members 910, and the game ball does not flow down on the part of the game board 30 ( It is preferable to set the decoration area or arrange the decoration member so that the game ball flowing down by the movable effect member 910 is not shielded.
96 to 100, illustration of the transparent cover member 950 of each movable effect device 900 is omitted for convenience.

The first link member 921 is connected to the odd-numbered movable effect member 910, and the second link member 922 is connected to the even-numbered movable effect member 910. Therefore, when only the drive motor 924 for the first link member 921 is moved and only the first link member 921 is slid, only the odd-numbered movable effect member 910 is rotated (state change), and the second link member 922 is moved. When only the drive motor 924 is moved and only the second link member 922 is slid, only the even-numbered movable effect member 910 rotates (state conversion).
Therefore, about half of the plurality of movable effect members 910 can be outward and the other half can be inward (see FIG. 97 (a)). Thereby, as the production of the variable display game, for example, as the degree of expectation for the special result (big hit) is higher, the movable production member 910 is more movable than the state where the half of the movable production member 910 faces outward (see FIG. 97A). It is possible to produce an effect such that the state in which all of the effect members 910 face outward (see FIG. 96B) appears with higher probability.
It should be noted that the number of movable effect members 910 whose states are changed is changed in accordance with the expectation level as a special result (for example, the higher the expectation level as a special result is, the greater the number of movable effect members 910 whose states are changed). It is also possible to control.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light emitting decoration portion 930 includes an LED substrate 931 having a plurality of LEDs 931a and a lens portion 932, and can emit light forward. In the case of this embodiment, a portion of the cover lens member 942 of the base member 940 that faces the LED substrate 931 is a lens portion 932.
The surface of the movable effect member 910 is covered with a reflective film (a reflective film formed by plating, vapor deposition, or the like). Therefore, the surface on the light emitting decoration portion 930 side of the surface of the movable effect member 910, that is, the surface facing the outside of the two surfaces constituting the acute angle portion of the substantially teardrop shape is irradiated from the light emitting decoration portion 930. The light reflection surface 910a can reflect the reflected light.

Here, the angle of the light reflection surface 910a with respect to the LED substrate 931 changes as the movable effect member 910 converts between the first state and the second state. That is, the light reflecting surface 910a changes the reflection direction of the light emitted from the light emitting decoration unit 930 when the movable effect member 910 converts between the first state and the second state. Therefore, the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitting decoration unit 930 is improved. Further, since the light reflecting surface 910a faces outward, the light emission effect by the light emitting decoration portion 930 is also appealing to surrounding players.
In the present embodiment, the entire surface of the movable effect member 910 is covered with the reflective film. However, it is sufficient that at least the surface that becomes the light reflecting surface 910a is covered with the reflective film.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes the movable effect device 900 in place of the lighting device 16 and the frame decoration device 18.
In other words, the lighting device 16 is provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment as an effect device (frame decoration device) capable of performing a light emission effect and an effect operation. It is provided only on the upper part of the glass frame 15. Moreover, although the frame decoration apparatus 18 is also provided in the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the frame decoration apparatus 18 can perform a light emission effect, but performs an effect operation. I can't.
In contrast, the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a plurality of movable effect devices arranged along the periphery of the window portion 15a as a device capable of performing a light emission effect and an effect operation. Since it is provided with 900, it is possible to perform a production operation in a wide range on the front surface of the glass frame 15, enhance the appeal to the player, and effectively improve the production effect.

Note that the movable effect member 910 may be provided with an LED.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), an LED board having a recess at the tip of the movable effect member 910 (the tip of the acute angle portion of the substantially teardrop shape) and having an LED 913a in the recess. It is also possible to configure to accommodate 913. Thereby, since not only the light emission decoration part 930 but light can be irradiated also from the movable production | presentation member 910, it becomes possible to improve production effects.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting decoration portion 930 is disposed outside the movable effect member 910 (on the side opposite to the window portion 15a). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emission decoration portion 930 is moved to the movable effect member 910. It is also possible to arrange it inside (window 15a side).
Moreover, in this embodiment, the light emission decoration part 930 is divided in the middle on account of arrangement space, However, The light emission decoration part 930 does not need to be divided in the middle.
Moreover, it is also possible to provide an independent drive mechanism for each movable effect member 910 so that each movable effect member 910 can be operated individually. As a result, for example, a wave operation or the like can be performed in which the plurality of movable effect members 910 are sequentially converted in accordance with the arrangement order, so that various effect operations can be performed.

It is also possible to configure so that the effect operation by the movable effect device 900 is performed in conjunction with the sound of the speaker.
Here, an example in which the rendering operation by the movable rendering device 900 is performed in conjunction with the sound of the speaker will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the case of the present embodiment, the game output from the speaker (upper speaker 19a (specifically, the speaker body of the upper speaker 19a)) to the holding frame (glass frame 15) so as to be adjacent to the movable effect device 900. A sound deriving unit 190 is provided for deriving the sound to the front of the gaming machine 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99, for example, the glass frame 15 is output from the upper left speaker 19a1 (specifically, the speaker body of the upper left speaker 19a1) so as to be adjacent to the left frame rendering device 901. A left-side sound deriving unit 191 for deriving game sound to the front of the gaming machine 10 is provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 98, a game output to the glass frame 15 from the upper right speaker 19a2 (specifically, the speaker body of the upper right speaker 19a2) so as to be adjacent to the right frame effect device 902. A right sound deriving unit 192 for deriving the sound in front of the gaming machine 10 is provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 98, when the game sound is output from the right sound deriving unit 192 and the game sound is not output from the left sound deriving unit 191, (or the volume of the game sound output from the right sound deriving unit 192). Is greater than the volume of the game sound output from the left sound deriving unit 191), the left frame effect device 901 and the upper frame effect device 903 do not perform the effect operation, and only the right frame effect device 902 performs the effect operation. I do.
For example, as shown in FIG. 99, when the game sound is output from the left sound deriving unit 191 and the game sound is not output from the right sound deriving unit 192 (or the volume of the game sound output from the left sound deriving unit 191) Is greater than the volume of the game sound output from the right sound deriving unit 192), the rendering operation by the right frame rendering device 902 and the upper frame rendering device 903 is not performed, and only the rendering operation by the left frame rendering device 901 is performed. I do.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 100, when game sound is output from the left sound derivation unit 191 or from the right sound derivation unit 192 (or the volume of the game sound output from the left sound derivation unit 191 and the right side When the volume of the game sound output from the sound deriving unit 192 is substantially the same), first, an effect operation is performed by the upper frame effect device 903, and then by the left frame effect device 901 and the right frame effect device 902. Perform the production operation. That is, one rendering operation is performed using a plurality of movable rendering devices 900.
Here, the effect control device 300 serves as sound-linked effect means for controlling the effect operation by the movable effect device 900 so as to be interlocked with the game sound output from the sound deriving unit 190.
98 to 100 exemplify the wave operation as the effect operation performed in conjunction with the sound of the speaker, but the effect operation by the movable effect device 900 performed in conjunction with the sound of the speaker is not limited to the wave operation, It can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
In addition, the type and operation order of the movable effect device 900 that operates in conjunction with the sound of the speaker can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
Further, an effect operation by the movable effect device 900 may be performed so as to be interlocked with the light emission operation of the light emitting decoration part provided in the game area 32.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the movable effect member 910 provided in the movable effect device 900 is converted into the first state and the second state by a rotation operation around the rotation shaft 911 parallel to the surface of the cover glass 14. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the movable effect member 910 can operate in the first state approaching the center of the window portion 15a and the second state far from the center of the window portion 15a, the operation mode of the movable effect member 910 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the movable effect member 910 may be configured to be converted into a first state and a second state by a sliding operation set along the surface of the cover glass 14 (radial direction from the center of the cover glass 14). Is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable effect member 910 provided in the left frame effect device 901, the movable effect member 910 provided in the right frame effect device 902, the movable effect member 910 provided in the upper frame effect device 903, the cover effect of the cover glass 14 Although it was configured to convert between the first state and the second state by a rotation operation about a rotation axis 911 parallel to the surface, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable effect member provided in one movable effect device 900 It is also possible to configure so that the operation mode of 910 is different from the operation mode of the movable effect member 910 provided in another movable effect device 900.
Specifically, for example, the movable effect member 910 provided in one movable effect device 900 is converted into a first state and a second state by a slide operation set along the surface of the transparent member (cover glass 14). Then, the movable effect member 910 provided in the other movable effect device 900 is converted into the first state and the second state by the rotation operation around the rotation shaft 911 parallel to the surface of the transparent member (cover glass 14). It is also possible to constitute so.
In particular, the movable effect member 910 provided in the one-side movable effect device (left frame effect device 901) is brought into a first state and a second state by a slide operation set along the surface of the transparent member (cover glass 14). The movable effect member 910 that is converted and provided in the other side movable effect device (right frame effect device 902) is in the first state by a rotation operation centered on the rotation shaft 911 parallel to the surface of the transparent member (cover glass 14). And the second state, the movable effect member 910 provided in the left side frame effect device 901 on the pivot side is replaced with the movable effect member 910 provided in the right side frame effect device 902 on the side opposite to the axis side. It is possible to perform a production operation in a narrower operating range.

《Game board》
FIG. 101 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 102 is a perspective view of the front structural member 600 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment as viewed from the front side. FIG. 103 is a perspective view of the back surface component 700 provided in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment as viewed from the front surface side.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game board 30 is replaced with a starting ball forming member 640, a stored ball effect device 730, a winning ball effect device 770, and a discharge ball channel member 780, and a winning ball channel member 701 and a hold. The point provided with the display unit 7000 is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, the front structural member (center case) 600 includes a start opening forming member 640 that forms a second special figure 1 start winning opening 641 and a second special figure 1 start winning opening 641. And a start port 3 switch 644 for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the.
Further, in the present embodiment, the partition wall member 630 of the front component member 600 includes a flange portion 634 that is disposed so as to face the upper surface of the stage 621 with an interval at which the game ball can roll. . By providing the collar portion 634 on the partition wall member 630, the game ball bounced by a nail or the like below the stage 621 can be rebounded, or the game ball bounced on the stage 621 can be prevented from jumping out. Here, in the partition wall member 630, at least the partition wall (transparent panel portion) 631 and the flange portion 634 are made of a transparent material.
In addition, in 1st Embodiment and this embodiment, the partition wall member 630 may be provided with the collar part 634, and does not need to be provided.

As shown in FIG. 103, in this embodiment, the back surface component 700 does not include the storage ball effect device 730, the winning ball effect device 770, and the discharge ball channel member 780, but instead, a winning ball channel member. 701 and a holding display unit 7000 are provided.
The winning ball flow path member 701 is a member that forms a flow path for allowing a game ball won in the second special variable winning device (large winning opening) 39 to flow down to the discharge ball flow path 793c of the switch base unit 790. The control base member 720 is attached to the left part of the concave chamber. The winning ball channel member 701 has an introduction port 701a that opens toward the second special variable winning device 39 and a lead-out port 701b that opens toward the discharge ball channel 793c, and this lead-out port 701b. The game balls discharged from the ball are guided to the ball collection unit 84a (see FIG. 89) by the discharge ball channel 793c.
Further, the hold display unit (memory display unit) 7000 can notify and display information related to the start memory stored in the start storage means (game control device 100), and is behind the partition wall 631 of the partition wall member 630. (See FIG. 101), the control base member 720 is attached to the lower part of the concave chamber.

FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the hold display unit 7000 as viewed from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 104, the hold display unit 7000 includes a movable unit 7300, a driving motor 7200 that generates a driving force for operating the movable unit 7300 (in the case of this embodiment, a sliding operation in the vertical direction), And a unit base member 7100 for attaching the drive motor 7200 and the movable unit 7300 to the control base member 720.
The movable unit 7300 has a recessed chamber that opens to the rear and has a substantially concave decorative cover member 7400 as viewed from the front-rear direction, a rotation effect unit 7500 whose outer shape is substantially columnar, and a rotation effect unit 7500. In the state, it comprises a substantially plate-like movable base member 7600 that closes the opening of the decorative cover member 7400 from the rear, and a fluorescent lamp (fluorescent tube) 7410 that illuminates the decorative cover member 7400 from the back side.

105 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation effect unit 7500 as viewed from the front side, FIG. 106 (a) is a front view of the rotation effect unit 7500, and FIG. 106 (b) is the same as FIG. 106 (a). It is sectional drawing along the YY line.
As shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the rotation effect unit 7500 has an opening on one end side, and is arranged so that the opening faces the left or right side (left side in the case of the present embodiment). -Shaped rotating cylinder member 7510, a driving motor 7520 that is mounted on the bottom wall of the rotating cylinder member 7510 and generates a driving force for operating the rotating cylinder member 7510 (rotating operation in this embodiment), and the rotating cylinder A storage display unit 7530 that is inserted into the rotary cylinder member 7510 from the opening of the member 7510 and performs a storage display corresponding to the start-up storage.

  The storage display unit 7530 includes an LED substrate 7540 in which a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs in the case of the present embodiment) are mounted on one surface and the one surface faces forward, and one of the LED substrates 7540 The lens member 7550 attached to the other surface (front surface) and the substrate support member 7560 attached to the other surface (rear surface) of the LED substrate 7540. In the case of the present embodiment, the storage display unit 7530 serves as a storage display unit capable of performing a storage display corresponding to the number of start memories stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100).

The LED board 7540 is provided with one final notification LED 7541 that emits light for a notice effect for announcing the result of the running variable display game, and notifies the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. The number of hold display LEDs 7542 that emit light for a notice effect (hold notice effect) is the same as the upper limit number of special figure start memory (in the case of this embodiment, special figure 1 start memory) (four in the case of this embodiment). ) Is provided. These LEDs are arranged in a line along the left-right direction, and the final notification LED 7541 is arranged on the left-right side (in the present embodiment, the left-most side).
Further, a photosensor 7570 is attached to the left and right other side (right side in the case of this embodiment) of the other surface (rear surface) of the LED substrate 7540.

  The lens member 7550 includes a plurality of surrounding lens portions 7551 arranged in a line along the left-right direction so as to correspond to each of the plurality of LEDs included in the LED substrate 7540, and a substantially plate that integrally connects these surrounding lens portions 7551. And a rotation support flange portion 7553 having a substantially semi-disc shape standing on the lens connection member 7552.

The surrounding lens portion 7551 has a bottomed substantially cylindrical shape having an opening on one end side, and the periphery of the opening is joined to the lens connecting member 7552 with the opening facing rearward.
When the lens member 7550 is attached to the LED substrate 7540, each of the plurality of LEDs included in the LED substrate 7540 is independently surrounded by the corresponding surrounding lens portion 7551. Since the Go lens portion 7551 is made of a material whose side wall is opaque and the bottom wall is made of a lens, each Go lens portion 7551 independently surrounds the corresponding LED, so that the colors of the LEDs are mixed. Can be prevented. That is, only the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the surrounding lens portion 7551 is emitted from the bottom wall (lens) of the surrounding lens portion 7551.
The entire lens member 7550 may be made of a transparent material.

The rotation support flange portion 7553 corresponds to the final notification LED 7541 so that the string portion of the substantially semi-disc-shaped rotation support flange portion 7553 faces the LED substrate 7540 side in a state where the lens member 7550 is attached to the LED substrate 7540. It is disposed between the go lens unit 7551 and the go lens unit 7551 corresponding to the hold display LED 7542 adjacent to the final notification LED 7541.
In this embodiment, the lens member 7550 is provided with one rotation support flange portion 7553. However, the number of rotation support flange portions 7553 provided in the lens member 7550 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

The substrate support member 7560 is a substantially plate-like member that covers a portion of the rear surface of the LED substrate 7540 excluding a portion to which the photosensor 7570 is attached (that is, a portion on the left and right other side (right side in the present embodiment)). is there.
The substrate support member 7560 has a substantially semi-disc-shaped rotation support flange portion 7561. The rotation support flange portion 7561 has a substrate support member 7560 so that the string portion of the rotation support flange portion 7561 having a substantially semi-disc shape faces the LED substrate 7540 side in a state where the substrate support member 7560 is attached to the LED substrate 7540. Among them, the lens member 7550 is erected at three positions: a position corresponding to the rotation support flange portion 7553, the left and right other ends (the right end in the case of the present embodiment), and a space between them.
In this embodiment, the substrate support member 7560 is provided with three rotation support flange portions 7561. However, the number of rotation support flange portions 7561 provided on the substrate support member 7560 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

  The rotating cylinder member 7510 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating a portion of the memory display portion 7530 on the left and right other sides (right side in the present embodiment) with respect to the rotation support flange portion 7553 of the lens member 7550. Therefore, in a state where the storage display portion 7530 is inserted into the rotating tube member 7510 from the opening of the rotating tube member 7510, all the holding display LEDs 7542 and the surrounding lens portions 7551 corresponding thereto are arranged in the rotating tube member 7510. However, the final notification LED 7541 and the surrounding lens portion 7551 corresponding thereto are disposed outside the rotary cylinder member 7510. In the case of this embodiment, this rotating cylinder member 7510 is provided corresponding to the memory display means (memory display portion 7530), and a predetermined effect operation (in the case of this embodiment) in relation to the memory display in the memory display portion 7530. , Rotating operation means capable of performing a rotating operation).

As shown in FIG. 106, a bearing portion 7511 projects from the outer surface of the bottom wall of the rotating cylinder member 7510. By inserting the rotation shaft (output shaft) 7521 of the drive motor 7520 into the bearing portion 7511, the rotary cylinder member 7510 is rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 7520.
Here, the curvature of the arc portion of the rotation support flange portion 7553 provided in the lens member 7550 and the rotation support flange portion 7561 provided in the substrate support member 7560 is substantially the same as the curvature of the inner surface of the side wall of the rotation cylinder member 7510. Is set. Therefore, the rotation cylinder member 7510 can be supported from the inside by the rotation support flange portions 7553 and 7561 so that the rotation cylinder member 7510 does not rattle during rotation. Further, a rotation support flange portion 7553 provided in the lens member 7550 and a rotation support flange portion 7561 provided in the substrate support member 7560 (specifically, a rotation support flange corresponding to the rotation support flange portion 7553 of the lens member 7550). And the opening of the rotary cylinder member 7510 can be blocked by the portion 7561).

A plurality of through-holes penetrating the inside and outside of the rotating cylinder member 7510 are provided on the side wall of the rotating cylinder member 7510 as light passing portions 7510a that allow light to pass from the inside of the rotating cylinder member 7510 to the outside of the rotating cylinder member 7510. The plurality of light passing portions 7510a are arranged in a line along the left-right direction so as to correspond to each of the plurality of holding display LEDs 7542 provided in the LED substrate 7540.
Therefore, when the rotating cylinder member 7510 rotates and the surrounding lens part 7551 (that is, the surrounding lens part 7551 corresponding to the hold display LED 7542) disposed in the rotating cylinder member 7510 and the light transmitting part 7510a face each other. The bottom walls (lenses) of all the surrounding lens portions 7551 arranged in the rotating cylinder member 7510 are visible from the outside of the rotating cylinder member 7510 through the light passing portion 7510a.
In other words, when the surrounding lens portion 7551 arranged in the rotating cylinder member 7510 and the light passing portion 7510a are opposed to each other, if the hold display LED 7542 emits light, the light passing portion 7510a passes through the light passing portion 7510a. Although the light emitted from the hold display LED 7542 can be visually recognized, even if the hold display LED 7542 emits light when the surrounding lens portion 7551 and the light passing portion 7510a arranged in the rotating cylinder member 7510 are not opposed to each other. The light emitted from the hold display LED 7542 cannot be visually recognized.

That is, the movable effect means (rotating cylinder member 7510) can visually recognize the first state in which the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 (in the case of this embodiment, light emission of the hold display LED 7542) is invisible, and the memory display. It is configured to be convertible to the second state.
In the present embodiment, a plurality of light passing portions 7510a arranged in a line along the left-right direction so as to correspond to each of the plurality of holding display LEDs 7542 provided in the LED substrate 7540 are passed through the rotating cylinder member 7510 as a set. Although two sets of the portions 7510a are provided so as to face each other, the number of sets of the light transmitting portions 7510a provided in the rotating cylinder member 7510 can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 106 (b), a light shielding plate 7512 that is detected by a photosensor 7570 mounted on the LED substrate 7540 is provided inside the rotating cylinder member 7510.
In the case of the present embodiment, the light shielding plate 7512 is disposed on the inner surface of the side wall of the rotary cylinder member 7510 when the surrounding lens part 7551 disposed in the rotary cylinder member 7510 and the light transmitting part 7510a face each other. A protrusion is provided at a position between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit.
In this embodiment, the rotating cylinder member 7510 is provided with the two light shielding plates 7512. However, the number of the light shielding plates 7512 provided on the rotating cylinder member 7510 is equal to the number of light transmitting portions 7510a provided on the rotating cylinder member 7510. It can be arbitrarily arbitrarily changed according to the number or the like.
Further, the light shielding plate 7512 is disposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the photosensor 7570 when the surrounding lens unit 7551 disposed in the rotating cylinder member 7510 and the light transmitting unit 7510a do not face each other. May be provided.

FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit 7300 as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit 7300 as viewed from the rear side.
As shown in FIGS. 104 and 107 (a), a left support arm 7611 and a right support arm 7612 for supporting the rotation effect unit 7500 project from the front surface of the movable base member 7600.

In the case of this embodiment, the movable base member 7600 has two left support arms 7611 arranged vertically, and these left support arms 7611 have mounting flanges 7562 provided on the substrate support member 7560 of the rotation effect unit 7500. The storage display portion 7530 can be fixed to the movable base member 7600 by screwing the. In addition, the movable base member 7600 has two right support arms 7612 arranged in the vertical direction, and a mounting flange 7522 provided on the drive motor 7520 of the rotation effect unit 7500 is screwed to these right support arms 7612. Thus, the drive motor 7520 can be fixed to the movable base member 7600. That is, in the rotation effect unit 7500, only the rotating cylinder member 7510 rotates, and the storage display unit 7530 does not rotate.
Here, in the present embodiment, the storage display unit 7530 is configured such that the direction of the LED included in the LED substrate 7540 (that is, the direction of the bottom wall (lens) of the surrounding lens unit 7551 included in the lens member 7550) is obliquely upward. The movable base member 7600 is fixed. In this way, by directing the LED of the LED substrate 7540 obliquely upward, the LED faces the face of the player sitting in front of the gaming machine 10, so that the light emitted by the LED is easily visible. .

As shown in FIG. 107 (b), the interior of the decorative cover member 7400 (the recessed chamber having an opening at the rear) is divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper side is a unit storage space 7401 for storing the rotation effect unit 7500, and the lower part. The side is a fluorescent lamp storage space 7402 for storing a fluorescent lamp (fluorescent tube) 7410.
In the case of the present embodiment, the rotation effect unit 7500 is arranged such that the rotating cylinder member 7510 is accommodated in the concave portion of the decorative cover member 7400 having a substantially concave shape when viewed from the front-rear direction (see FIG. 103). Therefore, in the unit storage space 7401, a portion of the rotation effect unit 7500 on the left side of the rotation cylinder member 7510 (in the case of the present embodiment, the final notification LED 7541 and the surrounding lens portion 7551 corresponding thereto) and the rotation effect unit 7500 Among them, the portion on the right side of the rotating cylinder member 7510 (in the case of the present embodiment, the drive motor 7520) is housed.

As shown in FIG. 107 (a), an effect light emitting unit 7400a that emits light by a fluorescent lamp 7410 housed in a fluorescent lamp housing space 7402 is provided on the front surface of the decorative cover member 7400.
Note that a light source (for example, an LED substrate) other than the fluorescent lamp 7410 may be stored in the fluorescent lamp storage space 7402.

In addition, the decorative cover member 7400 is provided with one through hole that penetrates the decorative cover member 7400 in and out of the decorative cover member 7400 as a light transmitting portion 7400b that transmits light from the decorative cover member 7400 to the decorative cover member 7400. The light transmitting portion 7400b is provided at a position of the decorative cover member 7400 that faces the surrounding lens portion 7551 housed in the unit housing space 7401 (that is, the surrounding lens portion 7551 corresponding to the final notification LED 7541). Therefore, the bottom wall (lens) of the surrounding lens portion 7551 disposed in the unit storage space 7401 is visible from the outside of the decorative cover member 7400 through the light passing portion 7400b. Therefore, when the final notification LED 7541 emits light, the light emitted by the final notification LED 7541 can be visually recognized via the light transmitting unit 7400b.
In the present embodiment, the shape of the light transmitting portion 7510a of the rotating cylinder member 7510 is circular and the shape of the light transmitting portion 7400b of the decorative cover member 7400 is a star shape. However, the shapes of the light transmitting portions 7510a and 7400b are appropriately set. It can be changed arbitrarily. As in the present embodiment, the final notification LED 7541 emits light by making the shape of the light passing portion 7400b through which the light of the final notification LED 7541 passes and the shape of the light transmission portion 7510a through which the light emitted from the hold display LED 7542 passes are different. This is preferable because it is easy to distinguish whether the light is the light emitted from the hold display LED 7542.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107 (a), a left slide guide portion 7621 and a right slide guide portion 7622 each having a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction project from the front surface of the movable base member 7600. ing.
The left-right width of the movable base member 7600 is set larger than the left-right width of the decorative cover member 7400. Then, in the front surface of the movable base member 7600, in a state where the decorative cover member 7400 is attached to the movable base member 7600, a portion on the left side of the decorative cover member 7400 (that is, protrudes to the left from the left surface of the decorative cover member 7400). The left slide guide portion 7621 is disposed on the portion of the front surface of the movable base member 7600, and the portion on the right side of the decorative cover member 7400 (that is, the decorative member) in the state where the decorative cover member 7400 is attached to the movable base member 7600. A right slide guide portion 7622 is disposed on a portion protruding rightward from the right surface of the cover member 7400.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the unit base member 7100 mainly includes a rear wall portion 7101 facing the main body of the movable base member 7600 of the movable unit 7300 and a movable base in a state where the movable unit 7300 is attached to the unit base member 7100. A left wall portion 7102 covering the left slide guide portion 7621 projecting from the member 7600 main body from the outside, a right wall portion 7103 covering the right slide guide portion 7622 projecting from the movable base member 7600 body from the outside, Consists of.

On the inner surface of the left wall portion 7102 (the surface facing the left slide guide portion 7621), a substantially plate-like left stopper portion 7111 that is substantially orthogonal to the vertical direction is provided, and the inner surface (right side of the right wall portion 7103) A substantially plate-like right stopper portion 7112 that is substantially orthogonal to the vertical direction is provided on the surface facing the slide guide portion 7622.
A bar-shaped left guide rod 7121 extending substantially along the vertical direction protrudes from the upper surface of the left stopper portion 7111, and extends substantially along the vertical direction on the upper surface of the right stopper portion 7112. A rod-shaped right guide rod 7122 is projected.

The left guide rod 7121 is formed to have a thickness that can be slidably inserted into the through hole of the left slide guide portion 7621 of the movable base member 7600, and the right guide rod 7122 is a right slide guide of the movable base member 7600. It is formed in a thickness that can be slidably inserted into a through hole of the portion 7622. By inserting the guide rods 7121 and 7122 of the unit base member 7100 into the through holes of the slide guide portions 7621 and 7622 of the movable base member 7600, the operation of the movable unit 7300 (sliding operation in the vertical direction) is guided. It is like that.
Further, since the stopper portions 7111 and 7112 are arranged on the lower end side of the guide rods 7121 and 7122, the movable unit 7300 can be supported by the stopper portions 7111 and 7112 so that the movable unit 7300 does not fall off from the guide rods 7121 and 7122. ing.

As shown in FIG. 104, a substantially disc-shaped link cam (drive rotating body) 7210 is attached to the front surface of the drive motor 7200. The link cam 7210 is provided with a bearing portion. By inserting the rotation shaft (output shaft) of the drive motor 7200 into the bearing portion, the link cam 7210 operates the movable unit 7300 with the driving force of the drive motor 7200 ( In the case of the present embodiment, a drive operation (in the case of the present embodiment, a rotation operation) for performing a vertical slide operation) is performed.
A link pin (engagement pin) 7211 protrudes from the front surface of the link cam 7210 at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft. The movable base member 7600 is formed with a long hole-like slide groove 7600a extending in the left-right direction. The slide groove 7600a penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a size that allows the link pin 7211 of the link cam 7210 to be slidably inserted.

FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the sliding operation of the movable unit 7300 in the vertical direction. In FIG. 108, the rear wall portion 7101 of the unit base member 7100 is not shown for convenience.
One of the movable unit 7300 and the unit base member 7100 is provided with a light shielding plate (not shown), and the other is provided with a photosensor (not shown). Then, as shown in FIG. 108A, when the movable unit 7300 is in the initial position, the light shielding plate is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the photosensor, It is to be detected. That is, the photo sensor can detect that the movable unit 7300 is in the initial position. Note that the photo sensor may be configured to detect that the movable unit 7300 is not in the initial position.

When the movable unit 7300 is in the initial position, the link pin 7211 of the link cam 7210 is located at the lowest position that is lowered downward, and when the link cam 7210 is rotated by the driving force from the drive motor 7200, Move upward while drawing an arc trajectory.
The guide rods 7121 and 7122 of the unit base member 7100 are inserted into the through holes of the slide guide portions 7621 and 7622 of the movable base member 7600 included in the movable unit 7300. The movable unit 7300 includes the slide guide portions 7621, The movement in a direction other than the extending direction of 7611 (that is, a direction other than the vertical direction) is restricted.
Therefore, when the link pin 7211 moves upward while drawing a circular arc trajectory, the movable unit 7300 slides upward because the slide groove 7600a is pushed by the link pin 7211. Further, when the link pin 7211 moves downward while drawing the circular arc trajectory, the movable unit 7300 slides downward along the link pin 7211.

In this way, the movable unit 7300 slides in the vertical direction.
When the movable unit 7300 is in the initial position, the rotation effect unit 7500 is disposed behind the partition wall member 630 and is visible from the front through the transparent partition wall 631. When the link cam 7210 is rotated and the link pin 7211 is positioned at the uppermost position where the link pin 7211 is moved upward, the rotation effect unit 7500 is disposed above the flange portion 634 of the partition wall member 630, and the decorative cover member 7400 The effect light emitting unit 7400a can be viewed from the front through the transparent partition wall 631.

Furthermore, the movable unit 7300 is configured such that the storage display (that is, the light emission of the hold display LED 7542) in the storage display unit 7530 is hidden or displayed by the rotation of the rotary cylinder member 7510 by the driving force from the drive motor 7520. .
Here, in the present embodiment, the rotating cylinder member 7510 is configured to rotate (half rotation) in accordance with the timing of switching the memory display in the memory display unit 7530. Specifically, rotation of the rotary cylinder member 7510 is started before switching the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 to make the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 invisible, and the memory display unit 7530 rotates after switching the memory display. The rotation of the cylindrical member 7510 is finished, and the storage display (storage display after switching (after change)) in the storage display portion 7530 is made visible.
The rotation method and timing of rotation of the rotating cylinder member 7510 may be arbitrarily determined as long as the rotation effect of the rotating cylinder member 7510 can improve the presentation effect of the holding notice effect and the appeal to the player. It can be changed.

[Advance (prefetching) production setting processing]
In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 performs a prior (prefetch) effect setting process shown in FIG. 109 in place of the prior (prefetch) effect setting process shown in FIG.
Here, in the present embodiment, the memory display (holding display) corresponding to the number of the special figure 1 start memory (first start memory) is performed using the memory display portion 7530 of the movable unit 7300, and the main display device 41 A hold display 47 corresponding to the special figure 2 start memory (second start memory) is displayed in the memory display area 43 of the display unit 41a.

In this advance (prefetch) effect setting process, first, it is checked whether or not the execution condition for executing the continuous notice is satisfied (step D11), and it is determined whether or not the execution condition is satisfied (step D12).
Here, the execution condition for executing the continuous notice is that the change effect pattern of the special figure change display game based on the special figure start memory corresponding to the prior determination command is SP2-4 reach, and the execution of the continuous notice is performed. There is a special figure start memory for executing the special figure variation display game prior to the special figure start memory corresponding to the received advance judgment command, and the special figure start memory corresponding to the prior judgment command executes the continuous notice. For example, winning a lottery.

If it is determined in step D12 that the execution condition is satisfied (step D12; Yes), the continuous notice mode is determined based on the symbol information and the reach system information (step D13), and the current number of holds (starting memory) Number), the number of continuous notices is determined (step D14).
Here, there are two types of notice modes for continuous notice, one for operating the sub display device 801 and one for not operating the sub display apparatus 801. For example, the continuous notice for operating the sub display device 801 is a sub notice as shown in FIGS. The display device 801 can be selected on the condition that the effect for operating the display device 801 is not executed in the special figure variation display game that is the execution target of the continuous notice. In addition, the number of the first special figure start memories to be consumed before the execution of the special figure variation display game based on the special figure start memory to be subjected to the continuous notice is set as the number of continuous notices.

Thereafter, the execution information of the continuous notice is saved in the corresponding holding (starting) storage area (step D15), and the advance (prefetching) effect setting process is ended.
As a result, for a specific start memory, by performing an effect in a plurality of consecutive special figure fluctuation display games based on the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory, the preliminary determination information about the start memory is notified and suggested. Information related to the execution of continuous notice is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D12 that the execution condition is not satisfied (step D12; No), it is determined whether or not a pending notice is being made (step D16). Here, when the movable unit 7300 is being slid in the vertical direction or the rotating operation of the rotary cylinder member 7510 included in the movable unit 7300 is being executed, it is determined that the pending notice is being made.
If it is determined in step D16 that the advance notice is on hold (step D16; Yes), the advance (prefetch) effect setting process is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of holding notices are not executed simultaneously, it is easy to understand which holding notice corresponds to the holding notice being executed. It should be noted that a plurality of hold notices may be executed simultaneously.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step D16 that the hold notice is not in progress (step D16; No), the notice action mode is determined based on the symbol information and the reach system information with reference to the hold notice action distribution table (step D17). ).
FIG. 110 (a) shows an example of a pending pre-movement motion distribution table.
According to the pending recurring motion distribution table shown in FIG. 110 (a), for example, when the symbol information is “out of” and the reach system information is “no reach”, “−” is selected with a probability of 99%. Then, “forward rotation” is selected with a probability of 1%.

Here, the “forward rotation” is an operation in which the rotating cylinder member 7510 included in the movable unit 7300 is rotated forward (rotation in which the light transmitting portion 7510a moves from top to bottom) with the movable unit 7300 in the initial position. It is an aspect.
Further, “reverse rotation” is an operation mode in which the rotating cylinder member 7510 provided in the movable unit 7300 is reversely rotated (rotation in which the light transmitting portion 7510a moves from bottom to top) in a state where the movable unit 7300 is in the initial position. That is. In the case of the present embodiment, the reliability (expected degree) in which “reverse rotation” is a special result is higher than “forward rotation”.
Further, “ascending + forward rotation” refers to an operation mode in which the rotating cylinder member 7510 included in the movable unit 7300 is rotated forward while the movable unit 7300 is raised or raised. In the case of the present embodiment, the reliability (expected degree) in which “ascending + forward rotation” is a special result is higher than “reverse rotation”.
Further, “rising + reverse rotation” is an operation mode in which the rotating cylinder member 7510 provided in the movable unit 7300 is reversely rotated while the movable unit 7300 is raised or raised. In the case of the present embodiment, the reliability (expectation) with which the “rising + forward rotation” is a special result is higher than the “rising + forward rotation”.
Further, “−” indicates that the movable unit 7300 is not slid in the vertical direction and the rotating operation of the rotary cylinder member 7510 provided in the movable unit 7300 is not executed, that is, the holding notice is not executed.

Next, it is determined whether the determined notice operation mode is “−” (step D18).
If it is determined in step D18 that the determined notice action mode is "-" (step D18; Yes), that is, if the start memory stored most recently is not subject to the hold notice, a prior (pre-read) effect The setting process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D18 that the determined notice action mode is not “−” (step D18; No), that is, when the most recently stored start memory is the subject of the hold notice, the hold notice form is used. The notice light emission mode is determined based on the reach system information and the current number of holdings (starting memory number) with reference to the distribution table (step D19).

FIG. 110 (b) shows an example of the hold notice mode distribution table.
In the memory display portion 7530 of the movable unit 7300, the position of the LED indicating one start memory moves each time the start memory is consumed. For example, when the current start memory number is “4”, the LED indicating the most recently stored start memory is changed from the hold display LED 7542 farthest from the last notification LED 7541 to the last notification LED 7541 each time the start memory is consumed. The second distant display LED 7542 → the third distant hold display LED 7542 → the third distant hold display LED 7542 → the hold display LED 7542 adjacent to the final report LED 7541 → the last report LED 7541 is switched in this order.

According to the hold notice mode distribution table shown in FIG. 110 (b), for example, when the reach system information is “SP4” and the current start memory number (hold number) is “4”, the hold notice is first given. As the LED indicating the start memory as the target of the hold, the hold display LED 7542 farthest from the final notification LED 7541 emits “white”, and when the next start memory is digested, as the LED indicating the start memory as the target of the hold notice, The hold display LED 7542 farthest from the notification LED 7541 emits light in “blue”, and when the next start memory is digested, the hold display LED 7542 third from the final notification LED 7541 is used as an LED indicating the start memory to be reserved. Flashes “yellow”, and at the time of digestion of the next start memory, the final notification LE is indicated as an LED indicating the start memory to be reserved. The hold display LED 7542 next to 7541 emits “red” light, and the final notification LED 7541 emits “rainbow” light when the next start memory (that is, the start memory subject to the hold notice) is digested. Aspect is selected with 100% probability.
It is assumed that the LED indicating the start memory that is not subject to the hold notice emits light in a default color (white in the present embodiment).

Next, the execution information of the hold notice (that is, information related to the notice operation mode determined in step D17, information related to the notice light emission mode determined in step D19, etc.) is saved in the corresponding hold (start) storage area (step D20). The advance (prefetching) effect setting process is terminated.
As a result, for a specific start memory (start memory to be subject to a hold notice), the start is performed by performing an effect in a plurality of consecutive special view variable display games based on the start memory. Information related to the execution of the hold notice that informs and suggests the pre-determination information about storage is set.
In addition, because there is no condition judgment as to whether or not the continuous notice is being executed in the hold notice, the continuous notice and the hold notice may proceed at the same time. Only priority may be executed.

[Advance (prefetching) production execution processing]
In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 performs a prior (prefetch) effect execution process shown in FIG. 111 in place of the prior (prefetch) effect execution process shown in FIG.
In this advance (prefetching) effect execution process, first, it is checked whether there is execution information of continuous notice in the hold (start) storage area (step D31), and it is determined whether there is execution information of continuous notice (step D32).

If it is determined in step D32 that there is execution information for the continuous notice (step D32; Yes), the continuous notice execution process shown in FIG. It is checked whether or not there is execution information (step D34), and it is determined whether or not there is execution information for a pending notice (step D35).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D32 that there is no continuous notice execution information (step D32; No), the process proceeds to step D34 without performing the continuous notice execution process.

If it is determined in step D35 that there is execution information for the hold notice (step D35; Yes), the hold notice execution process is performed (step D36), and the advance (prefetch) effect execution process is terminated. That is, the production control device 300 controls the hold display unit 7000 (the storage display unit (memory display unit 7530) and the movable production unit (rotary cylinder member 7510)) based on the determination result of the prior determination unit (game control device 100). Thus, a notice effect means capable of performing a notice effect (holding notice effect) is provided.
If it is determined in step D35 that there is no execution information for the hold notice (step D35; No), the advance (prefetch) effect execution process is terminated without performing the hold notice execution process.

[Holding notice execution process]
FIG. 112 shows the hold notice execution process (step D36) in the advance (prefetch) effect execution process.
In this hold notice execution process, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display (step D41).
If it is determined in step D41 that it is not the start timing of the variable display (step D41; No), the process proceeds to step D49.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D41 that it is the start timing of the variable display (step D41; Yes), it is checked whether or not the rising information is stored in the hold (start) storage area (step D42). Then, it is determined whether or not the rising information is stored (step D43). Here, it is determined that the ascending information is stored when the information related to the notice operation mode including “rising” is stored as the holding notice execution information in the holding (starting) storage area.

If it is determined in step D43 that the increase information is not stored (step D43; No), the process proceeds to step D46.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D43 that the rising information is stored (step D43; Yes), it is determined whether the moving unit 7300 has been lifted (step D44).
If it is determined in step D44 that the movable unit 7300 has been lifted (step D44; Yes), the process proceeds to step D46.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D44 that the movable unit 7300 has not been raised (step D44; No), the raising operation of the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is set (step D45). Accordingly, the movable unit 7300 at the initial position slides upward by the driving force of the drive motor 7200.

In other words, the production control device 300 and the drive motor 7200 are arranged so that the storage display unit (storage display unit 7530) and the movable production unit (rotary cylinder member 7510) included in the storage display unit (holding display unit 7000) have a normal position and a specific position. Position moving means that can be moved between them.
Specifically, the position moving means (the effect control device 300 and the drive motor 7200) is a memory display means provided in the memory display unit (the hold display unit 7000) based on the execution of the notice effect by the notice effect means (the effect control device 300). (Storage display unit 7530) and movable effecting means (rotating cylinder member 7510) are configured to move from a normal position to a specific position.
Here, in the present embodiment, the normal position is a position corresponding to the end of the display area of the display device (main display device 41), and the specific position is the position of the display device (main display device 41) rather than the normal position. The position is closer to the center of the display area. Therefore, when the storage display unit 7530 and the rotating cylinder member 7510 are in the normal position, that is, when the movable unit 7300 is in the initial position, the storage display is performed via the partition wall (transparent panel unit) 631 of the partition wall member 630. The portion 7530 and the rotating cylinder member 7510 can be visually recognized. Further, when the movable unit 7300 is raised and the storage display unit 7530 and the rotating cylinder member 7510 reach a specific position, the storage display unit 7530 and the rotating cylinder member 7510 are located above the flange 634 of the partition wall member 630. The effect light emission part 7400a of the decorative cover member 7400 becomes visible through the partition wall (transparent panel part) 631 of the partition wall member 630.

  Next, it is checked whether or not the rotation information is stored in the hold (start) storage area (step D46), and it is determined whether or not the rotation information is stored (step D47). Here, when information regarding the notice operation mode including “forward rotation” or “reverse rotation” is stored in the hold (start) storage area as the execution information of the hold notice, the rotation information is stored. judge.

If it is determined in step D47 that rotation information is not stored (step D47; No), the process proceeds to step D49.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D47 that the rotation information is stored (step D47; Yes), the rotation operation of the rotation effect unit 7500 corresponding to the rotation information is set (step D48). Accordingly, when information related to the notice operation mode including “forward rotation” is stored in the hold (start) storage area as the execution information of the hold notice, the rotation effect unit 7500 is driven by the driving force of the drive motor 7520. The rotating cylinder member 7510 rotates forward. In addition, when information related to the notice operation mode including “reverse rotation” is stored in the hold (start) storage area as the execution information of the hold notice, the rotation effect unit 7500 uses the driving force of the drive motor 7520. The rotating cylinder member 7510 rotates in the reverse direction.
Further, together with the rotation operation of the rotation effect unit 7500 corresponding to the rotation information, the display switching operation of the storage display unit 7530 corresponding to the light emission information stored in the hold (start) storage area is also set. Here, the light emission information is information related to the notice light emission mode among the information stored as the execution information of the hold notice in the hold (start) storage area.

That is, the production control device 300 determines the display mode of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (in the case of the present embodiment, the start of the variable display), the determination result of the prior determination means (game control device 100) Display mode control means capable of changing the display mode according to the display mode, and causing the movable presentation means (rotating cylinder member 7510) to perform an effect operation in relation to the change in the display mode of the memory display by the display mode control means. And directing operation control means capable of
In the case of the present embodiment, the presentation operation control means (production control device 300) causes the rotating cylinder member 7510 to be in the first state (stored in the storage display unit 7530) at the timing when the display mode of the storage display in the storage display unit 7530 changes. It is configured to convert between a state in which the display is invisible and a second state (a state in which the storage display in the storage display unit 7530 is visible). More specifically, the production operation control means (production control device 300) converts the movable production means (rotating cylinder member 7510) to the first state before the display mode of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 is changed, and After the display mode of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 is changed, the movable effecting means (the rotating cylinder member 7510) is converted to the second state.

Next, it is determined whether the variable display is being executed (step D49).
If it is determined in step D49 that the variable display is not being executed (step D49; No), the pending notice execution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D49 that the variable display is being executed (step D49; Yes), it is checked whether or not the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is rising (step D50). ), It is determined whether or not it is rising (step D51). Here, when the movable unit 7300 is not in the initial position, it is determined that the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is moving up.

If it is determined in step D51 that the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is not moving up (step D51; No), the process proceeds to step D55.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D51 that the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is moving up (step D51; Yes), whether or not the lowering condition of the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is satisfied. Is checked (step D52), and it is determined whether the descent condition is satisfied (step D53). Here, the descent condition is a start memory (previous hold memory) that is digested before the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is the subject of the hold notice or the start memory that is the subject of the hold notice. In the special figure fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game or second special figure fluctuation display game) based on the above, it has become a state of the previous stage (reach state) that develops to SP reach, and is subject to hold notice Special-fluctuation display game based on the start memory stored in advance, or the special-fluctuation display game based on the start memory (preceding hold memory) that is digested before the start memory subject to the hold notice The result of the game or the second special figure variation display game) is “winning”. When the movable unit 7300 is raised, the visible area of the display area of the main display device 41 is reduced. However, when the movable unit 7300 is lowered and returned to the initial position, a larger area can be secured as a visible area. Therefore, the dynamic display can be performed by the main display device 41.

If it is determined in step D53 that the descent condition is not satisfied (step D53; No), the process proceeds to step D55.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step D53 that the descent condition is satisfied (step D53; Yes), the descent operation of the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is set (step D54). Accordingly, the movable unit 7300 that has been lifted is slid downward by the driving force of the drive motor 7200 and returned to the initial position.

Next, it is checked whether or not the cancellation notice cancellation condition is satisfied (step D55), and it is determined whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied (step D56). Here, the cancellation condition is a start memory (preceding hold memory) that is digested before the special-figure display game based on the start memory that is the subject of the hold notice or the start memory that is the subject of the hold notice. Is that a big hit has occurred in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the above (first special figure fluctuation display game or second special figure fluctuation display game).
If it is determined in step D56 that the cancel condition is satisfied (step D56; Yes), the execution information of the hold notice stored in the hold (start) storage area is cleared (step D57), and the hold is made. The notice execution process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D56 that the cancel condition is not satisfied (step D56; No), the hold notice is not cleared without clearing the execution information of the hold notice stored in the hold (start) storage area. The execution process is terminated.

If the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is being lifted when clearing the pending notice execution information, the descent operation of the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300) is set.
In addition, at the end of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory subject to the hold notice, the hold notice execution information stored in the hold (start) storage area (the hold notice execution information for the start memory) ) Is not cleared, the execution information of the hold notice is cleared.

113 and 114 show an example of the hold notice.
First, when a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game is detected (E11), a new special figure 1 start memory is stored.
Here, it is assumed that one special figure 1 start memory has already been stored before the new special figure 1 start memory is stored. Therefore, the current number of holds becomes “2” by storing the new special figure 1 start memory.
Here, it is assumed that the new special figure 1 start memory is stored when the pending notice is not in progress. Therefore, the process (step D17 and step D19 of FIG. 109) which determines the notice action mode and notice light emission aspect corresponding to the new special figure 1 start memory is executed. In the case of this example, it is assumed that the symbol information corresponding to the new special figure 1 start memory is “out of” and the reach system information is “SP1 reach”. Then, it is assumed that “forward rotation” is selected as the notice operation mode and “white → blue → blue” is selected as the notice light emission mode, and the new special figure 1 start memory becomes the subject of the hold notice. Therefore, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 113, in addition to the already-lit LEDs 7541 and 7542, the new special figure 1 start memory (that is, the special figure 1 start memory subject to the hold notice) is shown. As an LED, a hold display LED 7542 that is the third furthest from the final notification LED 7541 lights in white.

Thereafter, the variable display in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c is stopped (E12), and the first special figure variable display game is ended.
When the next first special figure variation display game is started and variation display in the variation display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is started (E13), the hold update operation (hold update effect) is started.

  Here, the pending update operation is an effect operation by the movable unit 7300 and a memory display switching operation in the memory display unit 7530. In this example, the ascending information is not stored in the hold (start) storage area, but the rotation information (“forward rotation”) is stored. As shown in the figure, the rotating cylinder member 7510 of the movable unit 7300 rotates (forward rotation) in a state where the movable unit 7300 is in the initial position. In addition, the storage display in the storage display unit 7530 is switched by the hold update operation, and the hold display LED 7542 adjacent to the final notification LED 7541 is lit in blue as an LED indicating the start memory subject to the hold notice.

Note that during the period in which the rotating cylinder member 7510 is being rotated, the final notification LED 7541 may be turned off or may be lit in the default color (white).
Further, during the period in which the rotating cylinder member 7510 is rotated, that is, during the period in which the rotating cylinder member 7510 rotates to hide the memory display in the memory display portion 7530 (the shielding period), the hold display LED 7542 is turned on. You can leave it off or turn it off, but it will save energy if you turn it off.

In the present embodiment, the hold update operation is completed until the variable display in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c shifts to high-speed fluctuation.
Accordingly, during fluctuation (during high-speed fluctuation) (E14), as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 113, the stored display after switching (after change) becomes visible through the light passing portion 7510a of the rotating cylinder member 7510. ing.
Note that the timing for ending the pending update operation can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the pending update operation can be configured to end before shifting from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

Thereafter, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 114, the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is stopped (E15), and the first special figure fluctuation display game is ended.
Then, the next first special figure fluctuation display game (in this example, the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory that is the subject of the hold notice) is started, and the fluctuation display areas 42a, 42b, 42c are started. When the variable display at is started (E16), the hold update operation (hold update effect) is started.
When the hold update operation is started, as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 114, the rotary cylinder member 7510 rotates (forward rotation) again in a state where the movable unit 7300 is in the initial position. In addition, the storage display in the storage display section 7530 is switched by the hold update operation, and the final notification LED 7541 is lit in blue as an LED indicating the start memory that is the subject of the hold notice.

  When the start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game is detected between the start and end of the hold update operation (E17) and a new special figure 1 start memory is stored, the new special figure start memory is stored. The hold display LED 7542 indicating the start memory in FIG. Therefore, during fluctuation (during high-speed fluctuation) (E18), as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 114, not only the already-stored LED indicating special figure 1 start memory but also new special figure 1 start memory is indicated. The lighting of the hold display LED 7542 is also visible. Since the new special figure 1 start memory is stored during the pending notice (during the hold update operation), the notice operation mode and the notice light emission mode corresponding to the new special figure 1 start memory are determined. Processing (step D17 and step D19 in FIG. 109) is not executed.

115 to 117 show another example of the hold notice.
First, when a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game is detected (E21), a new special figure 1 start memory is stored.
Here, it is assumed that one special figure 1 start memory has already been stored before the new special figure 1 start memory is stored. Therefore, the current number of holds becomes “2” by storing the new special figure 1 start memory.
Here, it is assumed that the new special figure 1 start memory is stored when the pending notice is not in progress. Therefore, the process (step D17 and step D19 of FIG. 109) which determines the notice action mode and notice light emission aspect corresponding to the new special figure 1 start memory is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the symbol information corresponding to the new special figure 1 start memory is “big hit” and the reach system information is “SP3 reach”. Then, it is assumed that “ascending + forward rotation” is selected as the notice operation mode, “white → blue → yellow” is selected as the notice light emission mode, and the new special figure 1 start memory becomes the target of the hold notice. Therefore, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 115, in addition to the already-lit LEDs 7541 and 7542, the new special figure 1 start memory (that is, the special figure 1 start memory subject to the hold notice) is shown. As an LED, a hold display LED 7542 that is the third furthest from the final notification LED 7541 lights in white.

Thereafter, the variable display in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c is stopped (E22), and the first special figure variable display game is ended.
When the next first special figure variation display game is started and variation display in the variation display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is started (E23), the hold update operation (hold update effect) is started.

In this example, since the ascending information (“rising”) and the rotation information (“forward rotation”) are stored in the holding (starting) storage area, when the holding update operation is started, the middle diagram of FIG. As shown, the movable unit 7300 is raised while the rotating cylinder member 7510 of the movable unit 7300 is rotated (forward rotation). Thereby, the effect light emitting portion 7400a of the decorative cover member 7400 included in the movable unit 7300 appears (appears behind the partition wall (transparent panel portion) 631 of the partition wall member 630, specifically, at a position where it can be visually recognized by the player. ) And a storage display area 43 set in the lower part of the display unit 41a of the main display device 41 (in this embodiment, an area for displaying the hold display 47 corresponding to the second start-up storage) is a movable unit. It is shielded by 7300.
In the case of this example, the storage display in the storage display unit 7530 is switched by the hold update operation, and the hold display LED 7542 adjacent to the final notification LED 7541 is lit in blue as the LED indicating the start memory subject to the hold notice. To do.

In the present embodiment, when rising information (“rising”) is stored in the hold (start) storage area, the change display in the change display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is changed to the high speed change. (Or during the transition from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation, etc.) so that the storage display area 43 is completely shielded by the movable unit 7300 (that is, the storage display section 7530 and The movable unit 7300 is raised so that the rotating cylinder member 7510 reaches a specific position, and the hold update operation is terminated.
Accordingly, during fluctuation (during high-speed fluctuation) (E24), as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 115, the storage display area 43 is completely shielded by the movable unit 7300, and the storage display area 43 is shielded. The stored display after switching (after change) is visible through the light transmitting portion 7510a of the rotating cylinder member 7510.

Further, when the rising information (“rising”) is stored in the holding (starting) storage area, the fluorescent lamp (fluorescent tube) 7410 is turned on at a predetermined timing from the rising start to the lifting end of the movable unit 7300. The effect light-emitting unit 7400a is lit to emit light. In the case of this embodiment, since the hold notice that rises is higher than the hold notice that the movable unit 7300 does not rise (see FIG. 110B), the effect light emitting unit 7400a has a higher expectation (reliability). By functioning as a light emitting element, it functions as a notice period notifying unit capable of notifying (suggesting) a prefetch notice period with high expectation.
In other words, the position moving means (the effect control device 300 and the drive motor 7200) has a higher probability that the memory display unit (holding display unit 7000) has a higher probability as the notice effect with a higher expectation that is a special result is executed. (Storage display unit 7530) and movable effecting means (rotating cylinder member 7510) are configured to move from a normal position to a specific position.

Thereafter, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 116, the variable display in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, and 42c is stopped (E25), and the first special figure variable display game is ended.
Then, the next first special figure fluctuation display game (in this example, the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory that is the subject of the hold notice) is started, and the fluctuation display areas 42a, 42b, 42c are started. When the variable display at is started (E26), the hold update operation (hold update effect) is started.
When the hold update operation is started, as shown in the middle diagram of FIG. 116, the rotary cylinder member 7510 rotates (forward rotation) again while the movable unit 7300 is in the raised state. In addition, the storage display in the storage display section 7530 is switched by the hold update operation, and the final notification LED 7541 is lit in yellow as an LED indicating the start memory that is the subject of the hold notice.
Therefore, during fluctuation (during high-speed fluctuation) (E27), as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 116, the storage display area 43 is completely shielded by the movable unit 7300, and the storage display area 43 is shielded. The stored display after switching (after change) is visible through the light transmitting portion 7510a of the rotating cylinder member 7510.

In the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is the target of the hold notice, the reach state occurs (E28), and the state before the development to the SP reach is reached, that is, the rotation effect unit 7500 (movable unit 7300). ) Is established, the descent operation of the movable unit 7300 starts as shown in the upper diagram of FIG.
In this example, the descent operation is started immediately before the SP reach after the reach state is generated. However, when the SP reach is reached, the movable unit 7300 is moved to the initial position (that is, the storage display). If the part 7530 and the rotating cylinder member 7510 are at a specific position), the start timing of the lowering operation can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the lowering operation is started before the reach state that develops to SP reach occurs. It is also possible to configure as described above.
Then, when the movable unit 7300 descends and returns to the initial position (that is, the storage display portion 7530 and the rotating cylinder member 7510 return to the normal position), it develops into SP reach (E29) and is shown in the middle diagram of FIG. Thus, the SP reach development effect is executed.

During the execution of the SP reach development effect, when a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game is detected (E30) and a new special figure 1 start memory is stored, the LED already lit is displayed. In addition, the hold display LED 754 indicating the new special figure 1 start memory is also lit.
Thereafter, the variable display in the variable display areas 42a, 42b, 42c is stopped (E31), and the first special figure variable display game is ended. If the result is a big hit, a special result is displayed as shown in the lower diagram of FIG.

In this example, the special figure fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) based on the start memory (preceding hold memory) digested before the start memory that is the subject of the hold notice (prefetch hold notice) Alternatively, the SP reach is not generated in the second special figure fluctuation display game). However, when the SP reach occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the advance hold memory, the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed. At this time, the movable unit 7300 may be temporarily lowered, and the movable unit 7300 may be raised again (resumption of the prefetch hold notice) at the start of the next fluctuation.
Further, in this example, the special figure fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) based on the start memory (preceding hold memory) digested before the start memory subject to the hold notice (prefetch hold notice) In the second special figure fluctuation display game), a big hit is not generated. However, when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the preceding hold memory, the hold display unit 7000 is accompanied by the occurrence of the big hit. The hold notice (prefetch hold notice) may be canceled.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided in the surrounding frame (center case) 40 and can display information related to the start memory stored in the start memory means (game control device 100). A hold display unit (storage display unit) 7000 is provided.
The hold display unit 7000 corresponds to the storage display unit 7530 capable of performing storage display corresponding to the number of stored start memories stored in the start storage means (game control device 100), and the storage display unit 7530. A rotating cylinder member 7510 that is provided and capable of performing a predetermined effect operation in association with the memory display in the memory display portion 7530.
And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 is comprised so that a notice production | presentation can be performed by controlling the holding | maintenance display unit 7000 based on the determination result (prefetching result).
Specifically, the production control device 300 can change the display mode of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 to a display mode corresponding to the determination result (prefetch result) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, In relation to the change, the rotating cylinder member 7510 can be made to perform an effect operation. Therefore, the player is more likely to notice the change compared to the case where the display operation of the memory display is merely changed and the effect operation related to the change is not performed, so the effect of the notice effect and the appeal to the player The power can be improved, and it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the memory display (holding display) corresponding to the number of the special figure 1 start memory (first start memory) is performed using the memory display portion 7530 of the movable unit 7300, and the display of the main display device 41 is performed. Although the storage display area 43 of the unit 41a is configured to display the hold display 47 corresponding to the special figure 2 start storage (second start storage), the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage display unit 7530 of the movable unit 7300 is displayed. The memory display corresponding to the number of the special figure 2 start memory is used, and the storage display area 43 of the display unit 41a of the main display device 41 is configured to display the hold display 47 corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory. It is also possible.

In addition, the storage display unit 7530 of the movable unit 7300 is used to perform both the storage display corresponding to the storage number of the special figure 1 start memory and the storage display corresponding to the storage number of the special figure 2 start storage. It is also possible to do.
Specifically, for example, like the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 118, the rotation effect unit 7500 performs a memory display corresponding to the number stored in the special figure 1 start memory and an effect operation related to the memory display. Rotation effect area R1 for FIG. 1, rotation effect area R2 for special figure 2 that performs a memory display corresponding to the number of memories stored in the special figure 2 start memory, and an effect operation related to the memory display, and a rotation effect for special figure 1 It is also possible to provide a final notification area R3 that is provided between the area R1 and the rotation effect area R2 for the special figure 2 and that performs a notice effect for notifying the result of the running variable display game.

  In the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 118, the storage display unit 7530 included in the rotation effect unit 7500 includes a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line along the left-right direction. Among the plurality of LEDs, the LED arranged in the special effect rotation area R1 for special figure 1 becomes the hold display LED 7542 for special figure 1, and the LED arranged in the special rotation effect area R2 for special figure 2 is for special figure 2. The hold display LED 7542 is displayed, and the LED arranged in the final notification area R3 is the final notification LED 7541.

The final notification area R3 is provided with a light transmitting portion 7400b formed on the decorative cover member 7400, and light emitted from the final notification LED 7541 can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 7400b.
The hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 118 has only one final notification LED 7541, and this one final notification LED 7541 is shared by the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory. Yes. That is, the final notification LED 7541 emits light for a notice effect for notifying the result of the special figure 1 variable display game during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, and during execution of the special figure 2 variable display game. Is configured to emit light for a notice effect for notifying the result of the special figure 2 variable display game.

The rotation effect area R1 for the special figure 1 is provided with a rotating cylinder member 7510 that rotates independently, and the inside of the rotating cylinder member 7510 is provided via a light transmitting portion 7510a formed in the rotating cylinder member 7510. It is comprised so that the light which the holding | maintenance display LED7542 for the special figure 1 arrange | positioned in FIG.
Here, among the plurality of hold display LEDs 7542 for special figure 1, the hold display LED 7542 for special figure 1 that is closer to the final notification LED 7541 indicates the old special figure 1 start memory. That is, in the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 118, among the four hold display LEDs 7542 for the special figure 1 arranged on the left and right, the hold display LED 7542 for the special figure 1 on the rightmost side (that is, next to the final notification LED 7541). A hold display LED 7542 for a special figure 1 indicates the oldest special figure 1 start memory, and a hold display LED 7542 for the special figure 1 on the leftmost side indicates the new special figure 2 start memory. Therefore, the position of the LED indicating one special figure 1 start memory moves to the right whenever the special figure 1 start memory is digested.

The rotation effect area R2 for the special figure 2 is provided with a rotating cylinder member 7510 that rotates independently, and the inside of the rotating cylinder member 7510 is provided via a light transmitting portion 7510a formed in the rotating cylinder member 7510. The light emitted from the hold display LED 7542 for the special figure 2 arranged in FIG.
Here, among the plurality of hold display LEDs 7542 for special figure 2, the hold display LED 7542 for special figure 2 that is closer to the final notification LED 7541 indicates the old special figure 2 start memory. That is, in the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 118, among the four hold display LEDs 7542 for the special figure 2 arranged on the left and right, the hold display LED 7542 for the special figure 2 on the leftmost side (that is, next to the final notification LED 7541). The old special figure 2 start memory is indicated by the hold display LED 7542) for a certain special figure 2, and the newest special figure 2 start memory is indicated by the hold display LED 7542 for the special figure 2 on the rightmost side. Therefore, the position of the LED indicating one special figure 2 start memory moves to the left whenever the special figure 2 start memory is consumed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), when the special figure 1 start memory to be reserved is stored (held), the display mode of the storage display in the special figure 1 rotation effect area R1 is displayed. In relation to the change, the rotating cylinder member 7510 in the rotation effect area R1 for the special figure 1 is rotated, and the rotation cylinder member 7510 in the rotation effect area R2 for the special figure 2 is not rotated.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), when the special figure 2 start memory to be reserved is stored (held), the display of the storage display in the special figure 2 rotation effect area R2 is displayed. The rotary cylinder member 7510 in the special effect rotation effect area R2 for special figure 2 is rotated in relation to the change of the aspect, and the rotary cylinder member 7510 in the special rotation effect area R1 for special figure 1 is not rotated. In the example of FIG. 118 (b), not only the special figure 2 start memory but also the special figure 1 start memory is stored (suspended), but the second special figure fluctuation display game is more than the first special figure fluctuation display game. Since the display mode of the memory display in the rotation effect area R2 for the special figure 2 changes before the display mode of the memory display in the rotation effect area R1 for the special figure 1, Thus, the rotating cylinder member 7510 in the rotation effect region R2 for the special figure 2 rotates.

Of course, also in the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 118, the movable unit 7300 performs not only the rotating operation of the rotating cylinder member 7510 but also the ascending operation according to the reliability (expected degree) or the like as a special result.
In the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 118, the rotating cylinder member 7510 in the special effect rotation effect area R1 rotates only in the normal gaming state, and the rotation effect member R2 in the special effect rotation effect area R2 rotates. The member 7510 may be rotated (execution of the pre-reading hold notice in the special figure 2 start memory) only in the specific gaming state (electric support state). In addition, the display mode of the memory display changes only in the normal gaming state in the special effect rotation effect area R1 for special figure 1, and the display mode of the memory display changes in the special effect rotation effect area R2 for special figure 2. It may be only in a specific gaming state. In other words, the prefetch hold notice in the special figure 1 start memory may be executed only in the normal gaming state, and the prefetch hold notice in the special figure 2 start memory may be executed only in the specific game state.

Further, the hold display unit 7000 can be provided on the glass frame 15.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, a hold display unit 7000 is replaced between the upper left speaker 19 a 1 and the upper right speaker 19 a 2 in place of the upper frame effect device (upper movable effect device) 903. It is also possible to provide it.
Here, the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 119 and FIG. 120 also uses the storage display unit 7530 of the movable unit 7300 to store the memory display corresponding to the number of the special figure 1 start memory and the storage of the special figure 2 start memory. It is configured to perform both storage display corresponding to the number. Specifically, in the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the storage display unit 7530 included in the rotation effect unit 7500 includes a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line along the left-right direction. Among the plurality of LEDs, the LED arranged on the rightmost side (may be the left side) is the final notification LED 7541 for the special figure 1, and the LED arranged on the leftmost side (may be the right side) is special. The final notification LED 7541 for FIG. 2 is used, and the remaining LEDs are the hold display LED 7542.

The decorative cover member 7400 is provided with a light passing portion 7400b at a position facing the final notifying LED 7541 for the special figure 1, and the final notifying LED 7541 for the special figure 1 emits light through the light passing part 7400b. The light to be able to be visually recognized.
The decorative cover member 7400 is also provided with a light passing portion 7400b at a position facing the final notifying LED 7541 for the special figure 2, and the final notifying LED 7541 for the special figure 2 is provided via the light passing part 7400b. The light emitted by can be visually recognized.

  In the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the rotation effect unit 7500 has only one rotating cylinder member 7510, and is arranged in the one rotating cylinder member 7510 and the rotating cylinder member 7510. LED (holding display LED 7542) is shared between the special figure 1 start memory and the special figure 2 start memory. That is, by switching the rendering mode of the same memory display unit 7530 and the rotating cylinder member 7510, it is possible to switch between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 for use.

For example, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the normal gaming state, the LED arranged inside the rotary cylinder member 7510 becomes the hold display LED 7542 for the special figure 1, and the right final notification of the left and right final notification LEDs 7541. The LED 7541 (that is, the final notification LED 7541 for the special figure 1) is used. Then, the rotary cylinder member 7510 rotates in association with a change in the display mode of the storage display (here, the storage display corresponding to the number of stored special figure 1 start-up memories) in the storage display section 7530.
Here, among the plurality of hold display LEDs 7542, the hold display LED 7542 closer to the final notification LED 7541 for the special figure 1 indicates the old special figure 1 start memory. That is, in the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 120, among the four hold display LEDs 7542 arranged on the left and right, the hold display LED 7542 on the rightmost side (that is, the hold display LED 7542 next to the final notification LED 7541 for FIG. 1). Indicates the oldest special figure 1 start memory, and the leftmost hold display LED 7542 indicates the newest special figure 1 start memory. Therefore, the position of the LED indicating one special figure 1 start memory moves to the right whenever the special figure 1 start memory is digested.

On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the specific gaming state, the LED arranged inside the rotary cylinder member 7510 becomes the hold display LED 7542 for the special figure 2, and the left side of the left and right final notification LEDs 7541 The final notification LED 7541 (that is, the final notification LED 7541 for the special figure 2) is used. Then, the rotating cylinder member 7510 rotates in association with the change in the display mode of the storage display (here, the storage display corresponding to the number of stored memories in the special figure 2) in the storage display section 7530.
Here, among the plurality of hold display LEDs 7542, the hold display LED 7542 closer to the final notification LED 7541 for the special figure 2 indicates the old special figure 2 start memory. That is, in the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 120, among the four hold display LEDs 7542 arranged on the left and right, the leftmost hold display LED 7542 (that is, the hold display LED 7542 adjacent to the final notification LED 7541 for FIG. 2). Indicates the oldest special figure 2 start memory, and the hold display LED 7542 on the rightmost side indicates the newest special figure 2 start memory. Therefore, the position of the LED indicating one special figure 2 start memory moves to the left whenever the special figure 2 start memory is consumed.

That is, the start memory means (game control device 100) stores the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) by winning the game ball to the first start port (first special figure 1 start winning opening 36). 1 start storage means, and 2nd start storage means which memorize | stores a 2nd start memory by winning of a game ball to the 2nd start opening (normally variable winning device 37).
In addition, the game control device 100 can perform priority change control means capable of executing the change display game based on the second start memory in preference to the change display game based on the first start memory, and after the special game state is ended. And a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state (electric support state) in which the second start port (ordinary variation winning device 37) is more easily converted to the open state than in the normal game state.

The memory display means (memory display unit 7530) performs a memory display corresponding to the number of memories of the first start-up memory in a predetermined first display format in the normal gaming state, while the first display format in the specific gaming state. Is configured to display a memory corresponding to the number of memories of the second start memory in a second display format different from the above.
In the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 120, the position of the hold display LED 7542 indicating one special figure 1 start memory is changed to the final notice LED 7541 side for the special figure 1 every time the special figure 1 start memory is consumed (this modification). In the case of the example, the form to be moved to the right side) is the first display form, and the position of the hold display LED 7542 indicating one special figure 2 start memory is changed to the final for special figure 2 every time the special figure 2 start memory is digested. The format for moving to the notification LED 7541 side (left side in the case of this modification) is the second display format, but the first display format and the second display format are the light emission mode (lighting pattern and lighting color) of the hold display LED 7542. It can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

In the hold display unit 7000 shown in FIG. 120, the movable unit 7300 may perform a sliding operation in the vertical direction or the front-rear direction depending on the reliability (expected degree) or the like that is a special result. It is not necessary to perform.
120, when the movable unit 7300 of the holding display unit 7000 provided on the glass frame 15 performs a sliding operation in the vertical direction (specifically, when performing a lowering operation). ) Is preferably configured to move up and down to the extent that the game area 32 is not shielded, the game ball launched into the game area 32 is not hidden.
In addition, a non-entry area where the game ball does not enter may be formed in a part of the game board 30 corresponding to the slide operation range of the hold display unit 7000.

Further, a holding display unit 7000 capable of informing and displaying information relating to the special figure 1 start memory is provided on either the upper or lower part of the surrounding frame body 40 or the glass frame 15, and the special figure 2 start memory is provided on either one of them. It is also possible to provide a hold display unit 7000 capable of informing and displaying information relating to the information, and the special figure 1 start-up memory is provided in either the left part or the right part of the surrounding frame body 40 or the glass frame 15. It is also possible to provide a hold display unit 7000 capable of informing and displaying information relating to information, and providing a hold display unit 7000 capable of informing and displaying information relating to special figure 2 start-up memory on either one of them. .
In the above-described embodiment and modification, the hold display unit 7000 is arranged so that the alignment direction of the LEDs 7541 and 7542 is along the left-right direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the alignment direction of the LEDs 7541 and 7542 is not limited thereto. The direction along the line can be arbitrarily changed according to the arrangement position of the holding display unit 7000. For example, when the hold display unit 7000 is provided on the left part (or may be the right part) of the surrounding frame body 40 or the glass frame 15, the hold display is performed so that the alignment direction of the LEDs 7541 and 7542 is along the vertical direction. A unit 7000 can also be provided.

In a conventional game machine, for example, a pachinko game machine, when a game ball launched into a game area formed on a game board by a player operating a launch operation handle wins a start winning opening, a predetermined auxiliary game ( For example, a player who executes a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information or opens / closes a variable winning device having a special area set therein, and the result of the auxiliary game becomes a special result. It is common to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the game.
In such a gaming machine, it is related to the progress of the game at the lower part of the rectangular frame-like outer frame (specifically, between the bottom plate of the outer frame and the inner frame) that supports the inner frame that houses the game board so as to be opened and closed. There is known one provided with a speaker unit for outputting a game sound (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-078009).
By the way, on the back side of the inner frame in the conventional gaming machine, there is a ball discharge part for discharging game balls collected from the game area to the outside, and when the gaming machine is installed in the island facility, A ball tray portion of an out tank device for collecting game balls discharged from the gaming machine is arranged to face below the ball discharge portion.
However, when the speaker unit is composed of a speaker and a speaker housing (a space forming member) that constitutes an acoustic space (sound conducting space) of the speaker as in the gaming machine disclosed in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-078009. Therefore, there is a possibility that the speaker housing gets in the way when the ball receiving part of the out tank device faces below the ball discharge part, and there is a possibility that the ball receiving part cannot be arranged at an appropriate position.

  In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, an inner frame (front frame 12) that houses a game board 30 in which a game area 32 in which game balls can flow down is formed, and the inner frame (front frame 12). A rectangular frame-like outer frame (main body frame 11) that supports the door in an openable / closable manner, and a bottom plate (lower rib 11b) of the outer frame (main body frame 11) and a lower portion of the inner frame (front frame 12). And a speaker unit (screenboard speaker unit 500), wherein the rear surface side of the inner frame (front frame 12) faces above the speaker unit (screenboard speaker unit 500). A ball discharge portion 84b for discharging game balls collected from the game area 32 to the outside is provided, and a speaker unit (screenboard speaker unit 500) is a speaker (lower speaker 510) for outputting game sounds related to the game. ) And speaker (bottom A space forming member 520 that forms a sound guide space S for guiding the game sound output from the speaker 510) to the sound deriving portion 540c, and the space forming member 520 has an upper portion corresponding to the ball discharge portion 84b. A recessed portion 520a that is recessed over a predetermined range is formed.

  Therefore, even when a large acoustic space (sound guiding space S) is secured, the space forming member 520 (screen plate) is used when the ball receiving portion Ta of the out tank apparatus T is disposed below the ball discharge portion 84b. Since it is possible to avoid the speaker unit 500) being in the way, the arrangement of the ball receiving tray portion Ta of the out tank device T is not hindered.

  The speaker (lower speaker 510) is disposed at a position shifted in the left-right direction from the recess 520a with the front and back facing in the left-right direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the acoustic space (sound guiding space S) with a simple structure as compared to the case where the front and back surfaces of the lower speaker 510 are directed in the front-rear direction. It is also possible to prevent mischief with respect to the lower speaker 510.
The lower speaker 510 may be arranged with the front and back facing in the front-rear direction.
Further, the lower speaker 510 may not be disposed at a position shifted in the left-right direction from the recess 520a.

  The sound guide space S includes a first sound guide space (left acoustic space SL in the case of the present embodiment) for guiding game sounds output from the front and back sides of the speaker (lower speaker 510), and a speaker (lower portion). A second sound introduction space (in the case of the present embodiment, the right sound space SR) for guiding game sounds output from the other side of the speaker 510), and the sound derivation unit 540c includes the first sound introduction space. A first sound derivation unit (left sound emission hole 540c1) that derives the game sound guided by (left acoustic space SL) to the front side of the gaming machine 10, and a second sound guide space (right acoustic space SR). A second sound derivation unit (right sound emission hole 540c2) for deriving the game sound to the front side of the gaming machine 10, and the second sound derivation unit (right sound emission hole 540c2) includes a speaker (lower speaker 510). ) The diaphragm that resonates with the game sound output from (passive radiator) Motor 560) is disposed.

  Therefore, the game sound output from the lower speaker 510 can be strengthened (lower sound emission) by the passive radiator 560.

  In addition, on the front surface of the gaming machine 10 above the speaker unit (screenboard speaker unit 500), a launch operation handle (operation unit 24) that is operated by the player to launch a game ball in the game area 32 is provided. The second sound derivation unit (right sound emission hole 540c2) is set so that game sound is derived toward the firing operation handle (operation unit 24).

  Therefore, it becomes possible to apply the game sound (air vibration) strengthened (passive sound emission) by the passive radiator 560 to the player's hand operating the operation unit 24, and the player's tactile sense is stimulated to improve the interest of the game. Can be made.

  The space forming member 520 is formed over the sound guide space S, and supports a speaker (lower speaker wall 531) that supports the speaker (lower speaker 510) and a lower portion of the inner frame (front frame 12). And a load support part 542 that supports the load of the inner frame (front frame 12), and the load support part 542 forms a space so as to line up with the speaker support part (speaker support wall part 531). It is formed on the upper part of the member 520.

  Therefore, the load support portion 542 can be supported by the speaker support wall portion 531 that is strengthened by supporting the lower speaker 510, and the space forming member 520 is deformed so that the sound guide space S does not become the set value. Can be avoided.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed in an inner frame that is supported to be openable and closable is housed on the front surface of the outer frame, and a gaming area is placed on the front surface of the inner frame Generally, a holding frame (glass frame) holding a transparent member that can be seen through corresponding to a window portion is supported so as to be opened and closed.
In recent years, a movable effect device for executing effects that enhance the interest of games is provided on the front of the game machine, specifically on the upper part of the window formed on the holding frame (glass frame), etc., and can be moved as the game progresses. There has also been proposed a gaming machine in which a rendering device performs a rendering operation (see, for example, JP 2010-246711 A and JP 2005-230221 A).
By the way, in a gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-246711 and 2005-230221, a movable effect device that performs an effect operation is provided on an upper portion of a holding frame (glass frame). As a result, the appeal to the player was low and the production effect could not be enhanced effectively.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is provided on the front side of the storage frame (front frame 12) for storing the game board 30 in which the game area 32 is formed so that the game area 32 can be visually recognized. A gaming machine provided with a holding frame (glass frame 15) that holds a transparent member (cover glass 14) in correspondence with the window portion 15a, wherein the holding frame (glass frame 15) is disposed on the periphery of the window portion 15a. It is provided with a plurality of movable effect devices 900 arranged and capable of performing an effect operation according to the progress of the game, and the plurality of movable effect devices 900 includes a plurality of movable effect members 910 for executing the effect operation, Drive units 920 for causing the plurality of movable effect members 910 to perform an effect operation, and the plurality of movable effect members 910 are arranged on the holding frame (glass frame 15) so as to be arranged along the periphery of the window portion 15a. Placed on the front side That.

  Therefore, since the plurality of movable effect members 910 provided in each of the plurality of movable effect devices 900 are arranged along the periphery of the window portion 15a, it is possible to perform the effect operation in a wide range on the front surface of the glass frame 15. Thus, it is possible to increase the appeal to the player and effectively improve the performance effect.

  The plurality of movable effect members 910 are operable in a first state that approaches the center of the window portion 15a and a second state that is far from the center of the window portion 15a.

Therefore, since the plurality of movable effect members 910 provided in each of the plurality of movable effect devices 900 operate in a direction (radial direction) intersecting with the peripheral edge of the window portion 15a, a dynamic effect operation that expands and contracts the window portion 15a is performed. Can improve the fun of the game.
In the present embodiment, the movable effect member 910 includes a first state in which a tip thereof (a tip of an acute angle portion in a substantially teardrop shape) approaches the center of the window portion 15a and a second state that is far from the center of the window portion 15a. However, the manner of operation from the first state to the second state by the movable effect member 910 and the manner of operation from the second state to the first state depend on the shape of the movable effect member 910 and the like. It can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
Further, the movable effect member 910 is not limited to be operable in the first state approaching the center of the window portion 15a and in the second state far from the center of the window portion 15a, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 910 is arbitrarily determined as appropriate. Can be changed.

  In addition, the holding frame (glass frame 15) is attached to the front side of the storage frame (front frame 12) on the left and right sides (left side in the case of this embodiment) and the left and right other sides (right side in the case of this embodiment). Are configured to be opened and closed by moving in the left-right direction, and the plurality of movable effect devices 900 includes a one-side movable effect device (left frame effect device 901) disposed on the left and right sides of the window portion 15a, and a window portion. At least the other side movable effect device (right side frame effect device 902) arranged on the left and right other side of 15a, and one side movable relative to the forward projection amount of the other side movable effect device (right side frame effect device 902). The amount of forward projection of the effect device (left frame effect device 901) is set to be smaller.

  Therefore, by reducing the protruding amount of the left frame effect device 901 on the pivot side, the left frame effect device 901 becomes an equipment device (for example, a sand device such as a card unit) when the glass frame 15 is opened. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collision.

  Further, the movable effect member 910 provided in the one-side movable effect device (in the case of the present embodiment, the left frame effect device 901) is in the first state by the slide operation set along the surface of the transparent member (cover glass 14). And the second state, the movable effect member 910 provided in the other side movable effect device (in the case of this embodiment, the right frame effect device 902) has a rotation axis parallel to the surface of the transparent member (cover glass 14). It is also possible to configure to convert between the first state and the second state by a rotation operation centered on 911.

  The rotation operation requires a wider operation range (front-rear width) than the slide operation. By configuring in this way, the operation mode of the movable effect member 910 is set in front of the left frame effect device 901 and the right frame effect device 902. The amount of protrusion to the right side (in the case of the present embodiment, the left frame effect device 901 <the right frame effect device 902) can be used, and a limited space can be used efficiently.

  In addition, the movable side production device (the right side frame effect in the case of the present embodiment) is larger than the size or operation width of the movable effect member 910 provided in the one side movable effect device (the left side frame effect device 901 in the case of the present embodiment). The size or the operation width of the movable effect member 910 provided in the device 902) is set to be larger.

  Therefore, by setting the size or the operation width of the movable effect member 910 provided in the right frame effect device 902 that does not hinder the opening of the glass frame 15, a powerful effect operation (game effect) can be performed. .

  The plurality of movable effect devices 900 include a light emitting decoration unit 930 that can irradiate light forward, and the plurality of movable effect members 910 can reflect light emitted from the light emission decoration unit 930. 910a is provided, and the light reflecting surface 910a is configured to change the reflection direction of the light emitted from the light emitting decoration portion 930 by the movable effect member 910 converting between the first state and the second state.

  Therefore, the effect by the movable effect member 910 and the effect by the light emitting decoration unit 930 can mutually enhance the effect. It is also possible to increase the appeal effect to players who are not playing games.

  In addition, an operation control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the effect operation performed by the plurality of movable effect devices 900, and speakers (the speaker main body of the upper speaker 19a, the speaker main body of the lower speaker 19b, the lower part) according to the progress of the game Game sound control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the game sound output from the speaker 510), and the holding frame (glass frame 15) is adjacent to the movable effect device 900 so that the speaker (the book) In the case of the embodiment, a sound deriving unit 190 for deriving the game sound output from the speaker body of the upper speaker 19a) to the front of the gaming machine 10 is provided, and the operation control means (effect control device 300) Sound-linked effect means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect operation by the movable effect device 900 so as to be interlocked with the game sound output from the sound deriving unit 190 It is also possible to configure to obtain.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an effect operation by the movable effect device 900 so as to be interlocked with the game sound, and thus the effect of appealing the player to the player can be made extremely high.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a winning of a game ball to a starting port provided in a gaming area is stored as a starting memory within the upper limit number, and a plurality of identification information is based on the starting memory. When the variable display game according to the above is executed and the variable display game has a special result, a special game state advantageous to the player is generally generated.
In such a gaming machine, a memory display unit for performing a memory display corresponding to the number of starting memories is provided, and the display mode of the memory display displayed on the memory display unit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is set as a result of the prior determination. There is known a gaming machine that performs a notice effect to be changed in accordance with this (see, for example, JP 2010-227150 A and JP 2012-024265 A).
By the way, in gaming machines as described in the above-mentioned JP2010-227150A and JP2012-024265A, only the display mode of the memory display changes with the execution of the variable display game. There was a problem that it was difficult to notice and the effect of directing and appealing to players was low.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment has a display device (main display device 41) capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information, and a start port provided in the game area 32 (first special figure 1). Start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory up to the upper limit by winning game balls in the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, etc.), and the variable display executed based on the start memory A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the game has a predetermined special result, the number stored in the start memory stored in the start storage means (game control device 100) A memory display means (memory display section 7530) capable of performing a corresponding memory display and a memory display means (memory display section 7530) are provided in correspondence with the memory display and perform a predetermined effect operation. Possible Advance determination means capable of determining the start memory stored in the effect storage means (rotating cylinder member 7510) and the start storage means (game control device 100) before the variable display game corresponding to the start storage is executed. (Game control apparatus 100) and the hold display unit 7000 (memory display means (memory display part 7530) and movable effect means (rotary cylinder member 7510)) are controlled based on the determination result of the prior determination means (game control apparatus 100). A notice effect means (effect control device 300) capable of performing a notice effect (pending notice effect), and the notice effect means (effect control device 300) stores and displays the memory 753 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Display mode control means (effects) that can change the display mode of the memory display to a display mode corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means (game control device 100) Effect operation control capable of causing the moving effect means (rotating cylinder member 7510) to perform an effect operation in relation to the change in the display mode of the memory display by the control device 300) and the display mode control means (effect control device 300). Means (production control device 300).

  Therefore, since the rotary cylinder member 7510 performs an effect operation in relation to the change in the display mode of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530, the effect of the notice effect and the appeal to the player can be improved. It is possible to enhance interest.

In the present embodiment, the establishment of the “predetermined condition” is defined as “start of variable display”, and the display mode of the storage display in the storage display unit 7530 is changed based on the start of the variable display. "Can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the establishment of the “predetermined condition” can be defined as “pressing the effect button 25”, and the display mode of the storage display in the storage display unit 7530 can be changed based on the press of the effect button 25.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the start memory stored in the start storage means (game control device 100) is provided with storage display means (storage display portion 7530) and movable effect means (rotating cylinder member 7510). A storage display unit (holding display unit 7000) capable of informing and displaying information related to is supported to be openable and closable on the front surface of the storage frame (front frame 12) for storing the game board 30 in which the game area 32 is formed, You may provide in the front side of the holding frame (glass frame 15) holding the transparent member (cover glass 14) which can see through the game area | region 32. FIG.
The effect operation by the movable effect means is not limited to the rotation operation, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

  Further, the movable effect means (rotating cylinder member 7510) can be converted into a first state in which the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 is invisible and a second state in which the memory display is visible, and the rendering operation control is performed. The means (effect control device 300) is configured to convert the movable effect means (the rotating cylinder member 7510) between the first state and the second state in accordance with the timing at which the display mode of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 changes. ing.

  Therefore, since the visual state of the stored display can be changed in accordance with the timing at which the display mode of the stored display in the storage display unit 7530 changes, a more effective notice effect can be performed.

  Further, the production operation control means (production control device 300) converts the movable production means (the rotating cylinder member 7510) to the first state before the change of the display mode of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530, and the memory display unit 7530. After the change of the display mode of the memory display, the movable effect means (rotating cylinder member 7510) is converted to the second state.

  Therefore, before and after the change of the display mode of the memory display in the memory display portion 7530 can be separated and visually recognized by the conversion operation of the rotary cylinder member 7510, the appeal power of the notice effect is improved and the interest of the game is enhanced. Further increase.

The movable effect means converts the display state of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 to the first state, and converts to the second state after the change of the display mode of the memory display in the memory display unit 7530. For example, the display may be alternately converted into the first state and the second state a plurality of times from before to after the change of the display mode of the storage display in the storage display unit 7530.
Further, the movable effect means may not be convertible between the first state in which the memory display in the memory display unit 7530 is invisible and the second state in which the memory display is visible. An effect operation (such as a rotation operation or a swing operation) may be performed in a state in which the memory display in the unit 7530 is visible.
That is, the operation mode of the movable effect means can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
Also, the operation timing of the movable effect means can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

  Further, the position movement that can move the storage display means (storage display portion 7530) and the movable effect means (rotary cylinder member 7510), which are storage display units (holding display unit 7000), between the normal position and the specific position. Means (effect control device 300 and drive motor 7200), and the position moving means (effect control device 300 and drive motor 7200) is based on the execution of the notice effect by the notice effect means (effect control device 300). The display unit 7000) is configured to move the storage display unit (storage display unit 7530) and the movable effect unit (rotary cylinder member 7510) from the normal position to a specific position.

  Therefore, the storage display unit 7530 as the storage display unit (holding display unit 7000) and the storage display unit 7530 as the storage display unit (holding display unit 7000) by moving the storage display unit 7530 as the storage display unit (holding display unit 7000) and the rotating cylinder member 7510 to a specific position during the notice effect. Since it becomes easier to collect the player's line of sight on the rotating cylinder member 7510, the player will not miss the notice effect. In addition, the effect of the notice effect is greatly improved.

  Further, the position moving means (the effect control device 300 and the drive motor 7200) is a memory display unit that is a memory display unit (holding display unit 7000) with a higher probability as a notice effect with a high degree of expectation that is a special result is executed. (Storage display unit 7530) and movable effecting means (rotating cylinder member 7510) are configured to move from a normal position to a specific position.

  Accordingly, since the player can collect a sense of expectation as to whether or not the memory display unit 7530 and the rotating cylinder member 7510 move to the specific position, the effect of the announcement effect is greatly improved.

  Further, the normal position is a position corresponding to the end of the display area of the display device (main display device 41) (may be a position overlapping the display area or a position outside the display area). The specific position is a position closer to the center of the display area of the display device (main display device 41) than the normal position.

Accordingly, since the specific position is closer to the center of the display area of the main display device 41 than the normal position, the storage display unit 7530 and the rotary cylinder member 7510 which are storage display units (holding display unit 7000) move to the specific position. By doing so, even if the player concentrates on the variable display game, the player will not miss the notice effect.
The normal position and the specific position can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

  In addition, the starting port is a first starting port (first special figure 1 starting winning port 36) in which game balls can be won in a normal state, a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and an open state in which game balls can be won. And a start memory means (game control device 100) is a game ball to the first start port (first special figure 1 start winning port 36). The first start memory means for storing the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) by winning, and the second start memory (special figure 2) by winning the game ball to the second start port (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) Second start storage means for storing the start memory), and the variable display game based on the second start memory (the second special game) than the variable display game based on the first start memory (the first special figure variable display game). Priority fluctuation control means (game control) capable of giving priority to the figure fluctuation display game) 100) and the occurrence of a specific gaming state that can generate a specific gaming state in which the second starting port (normally changing prize device 37) is more easily converted to the open state than the normal gaming state after the special gaming state is ended. Means (game control device 100), and the memory display means (memory display unit 7530) performs a memory display corresponding to the number of memories stored in the first start memory in a predetermined first display format in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, it is also possible to perform a storage display corresponding to the number of memories stored in the second start memory in a second display format different from the first display format.

  With this configuration, it is possible to perform the memory display of the special figure 1 start memory and the memory display of the special figure 2 start memory with the single memory display unit 7530. Further, since the memory display portion 7530 is selectively used according to the gaming state, the player is not confused. Further, by changing the display format, it is easy to determine whether the display is the memory display of the special figure 1 start memory or the memory display of the special figure 2 start memory.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 11 body frame (outer frame)
11b Lower arm (bottom plate)
12 Front frame (inner frame, storage frame)
14 Cover glass (transparent member)
15 Glass frame (holding frame)
15a Window portion 19a Upper speaker (speaker)
19b Lower speaker (speaker)
24 Operation part (launching operation handle)
30 game board 32 game area 36 1st special figure 1 start winning opening (starting opening, 1st starting opening)
37 Ordinary variable prize winning device (starting port, second starting port)
41 Main display device (display device)
84b Ball discharging unit 100 Game control device (start storage means (first start storage means, second start storage means), pre-determination means, priority variation control means, specific game state generation means)
191 Left sound deriving unit (sound deriving unit)
192 Right sound deriving unit (sound deriving unit)
300 effect control device (operation control means, game sound control means, sound interlocking effect means, notice effect means, display mode control means, effect operation control means, position movement means)
500 Screen board speaker unit (speaker unit)
510 Lower speaker (speaker)
520 Space Forming Member 520a Recess 531 Speaker Support Wall (Speaker Support)
540c Sound derivation part 540c1 Left sound emission hole (first sound derivation part)
540c2 Right sound emission hole (second sound derivation part)
542 Load support portion 560 Passive radiator (diaphragm)
900 Movable rendering device 901 Left frame rendering device (one-side movable rendering device)
902 Right side frame effect device (other side movable effect device)
910 Movable production member 910a Light reflection surface 920 Drive unit 930 Light emission decoration unit 7000 Reservation display unit (memory display unit)
7200 Drive motor (position moving means)
7510 Rotating cylinder member (movable rendering means)
7530 Memory display unit (memory display means)
S Sound guide space SL Left sound space (first sound guide space)
SR Right acoustic space (second sound conduction space)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine provided with a holding frame that is provided on the front side of a storage frame that stores a game board in which a game area is formed, and that holds a transparent member corresponding to a window portion that allows the game area to be visually recognized ,
The holding frame is
Provided with a plurality of movable effect devices arranged on the periphery of the window part and capable of performing an effect operation according to the progress of the game,
The plurality of movable effect devices are:
A plurality of movable effect members for performing the effect operation;
A drive unit for causing the plurality of movable effect members to perform an effect operation,
The plurality of movable effect members are arranged on the front side of the holding frame so as to be arranged along the periphery of the window portion ,
A part of the game board is converted into a visually recognizable state and a visually difficult state by an effect operation of the plurality of movable effect members,
Some of the game board is a game machine, wherein the decorative region der Rukoto the game ball is not flow down. The plurality of movable effect members are:
A one-side movable effect device disposed on one side of the window,
The other side movable effect device disposed on the left and right other side of the window part, at least,
Ri operatively der and a second state moves away from the center of the first state towards the center of the window portion said window portion,
The movable effect member provided in the one-side movable effect device is converted into the first state and the second state by a slide operation set along the surface of the transparent member,
Movable effect member provided in the other side movable effect device includes a feature that you converted to said second state and said first state by the rotation movement about the surface parallel to the pivot shaft of said transparent member The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images